JP6642683B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, in response to establishment of the lottery condition is satisfied with the winning of game ball into the start hole or the like, those determination Ri by the predetermined lottery probability is executed. If it is determined that the hit on this determination, the lottery probability is executed for determining whether or not shifting to advantageously become high probability to the player, if it is determined that shifting is lottery probability to high probability A gaming machine which is shifted to a set gaming state is known. As described above, a gaming machine in which a game is diversified by shifting to a plurality of gaming states has been proposed.

JP 2011-125820 A

In this kind of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display unit on which at least character information indicating the content of a game is displayed, and a language type of the character information displayed on the display unit, based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A different specific address is set for each of the language types determined by the determining means and the language type determined by the determining means. It has a plurality of individual storage areas that are set to a plurality of addresses and store character information of the language type corresponding to the specific address, and are moved from each of the specific addresses corresponding to the same address information. The character information indicating the same display content is written in the individual storage area set in the address corresponding to the language type of the individual storage area. Storage means, and acquisition means for acquiring the address information corresponding to the display content of the character information to be displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the display condition, and a language type determined by the determination means. A selection unit that selects the character information stored in the individual storage area moved by an address corresponding to the address information acquired by the acquisition unit, based on the corresponding specific address, and a selection unit that selects the character information. Display control means for displaying the selected character information on the display means; voice acquisition means capable of acquiring speech data spoken by the player; and language based on the speech data acquired by the speech acquisition means. Speech language discriminating means capable of discriminating the type, wherein the deciding means is based on the language type discriminated by the speech language discriminating means. State, and are not to determine the language type, said display control means is for displaying the game information including the character information selected by said selection means to said display means, game state the contents of the game information Is switched based on the display .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , at least display means for displaying character information indicating the content of the game, and determination means for determining a language type of the character information displayed on the display means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition And a different specific address is set for each of the language types determined by the determination means, and is set to a plurality of addresses moved from each of the specific addresses corresponding to a plurality of address information indicating a predetermined address. And has a plurality of individual storage areas in which character information of the language type corresponding to the specific address is stored, and is set to an address moved from each of the specific addresses corresponding to the same address information. A storage unit in which the character information indicating the same display content is stored in the individual storage area corresponding to the language type of the individual storage area; Acquiring means for acquiring the address information corresponding to the display content of the character information to be displayed on the display means, based on satisfaction of a display condition, and acquiring the specific address corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means. Selecting means for selecting the character information stored in the individual storage area moved by an address corresponding to the address information acquired by the acquiring means as a reference, and the character information selected by the selecting means Display control means for displaying on the display means, speech acquisition means capable of acquiring speech data spoken by the player, and speech capable of determining a language type based on the speech data acquired by the speech acquisition means. Language determining means, wherein the determining means determines a language type based on the language type determined by the audio language determining means. Ri shall Der, the display control means is for displaying the game information including the character information selected by said selection means to said display means, to switch on the basis of the contents of the game information to the playing state To display . Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine that can be easily understood by a player can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen at the time of language setting displayed on a side display device, (b) is an actual display screen of a specification display mode displayed on a side display device. FIG. (A) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the normal display mode displayed on the side display device, (b) is the figure which showed the actual display screen of the probable change display mode displayed on the side display device. FIG. (A) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the big hit display mode displayed on a side display device, (b) is a preview character at the time of Japanese setting displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (C) is a diagram illustrating a preview character displayed in the third symbol display device when Danish language is set. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows a correspondence relationship between a first random number counter C1 and a special symbol big hit determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table, and (d) is a second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol hit determination value. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship of FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is a diagram schematically illustrating the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probable variation). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship with a variation type. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM in the audio lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a work RAM in the display control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sub display control device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a work RAM in the sub display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the sub display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a sound editing / output process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a language setting command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the sub display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the language initial setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device, and (b) shows a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. It is a flowchart. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the specification information command process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start command process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot information command processing which is executed by MPU in the sub display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device, and (b) shows a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. It is a flowchart. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a language setting process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an input detection process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a camera setting process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. It is a flow chart which showed firing detection processing performed by MPU in a sub display control device. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of language setting displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the notice display mode displayed. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a hall side display in a 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the language initial setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the language setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice analysis process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the language setting related process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a language setting command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed setting start command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in an external device according to the second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in an external device according to the second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display control process executed by an MPU in an external device according to the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side, a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side thereof, and a side display unit 600 rotatably supported on the right side of the front frame body 14. Is provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  An upper shaft portion 610a and a lower shaft portion 610b for rotatably supporting the side display unit 600 are provided at the upper and lower portions on the right side of the inner frame 12, respectively. The side display unit 600 has a side display device 901 that is rotatably fixed to the right side of the inner frame 12 and that is configured by a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The side display device 901 has a vertically long display area, and is configured such that a player can perform an input operation by performing a touch operation on the screen. As will be described later in detail, the side display unit 901 displays specification information such as a jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10, a setting screen for switching a language to be displayed, and the like.

  The player can obtain a variety of information related to the game by recognizing display information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the game board 13 and information displayed on the side display device 901 described later. It is possible to play a game while obtaining a lot of information from the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, since the side display unit 600 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, even when the pachinko machines 10 are arranged side by side on an island facility at a game store, the front frame 14 or the inside of the adjacent pachinko machines 10 may be installed. When the frame 12 is opened, the side display unit 600 can be prevented from hindering the opening operation.

  In the present embodiment, the side display unit 600 is configured to be rotatable, but may be configured to be fixed to the front frame 14. In this case, the side display unit 600 is fixed to the front frame 14 so as not to protrude from the outer shape of the front frame 14. Specifically, the side display unit 600 is arranged at the position of the illumination part 33 provided on the outer periphery of the window part 14c. In addition, the side display unit 600 (side display device 901) is fixed inside the protruding portion by projecting the shape of the illumination portion 33 so as to protrude toward the front side. The space for disposing the 600 can be increased, and the side display device 901 including a large display area can be disposed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release, and the release is repeated 4 times or 16 times (4 rounds or 16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D". After the special game state ends, the added value after the jackpot ends A game value (game value) corresponding to these jackpot types is provided to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. , And also at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot types of the special symbols, there are provided four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D.

  When the "big hit A" and the "big hit C" are reached, the state shifts to the special game state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds. In the case of "big hit A", as a value added after the big hit, the state shifts to the special symbol high probability state (special change state of the special symbol) from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit C", as the added value after the big hit end, it shifts to the "normal symbol time saving state" in a period from the end of the big hit until the special symbol changes 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (probable change state of the special symbol). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the “high probability state” is called “the special symbol low probability state (normal game state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol Indicates that the jackpot probability is in a normal state (normal state of a special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. . Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a probable change game state. On the other hand, a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state is referred to as a normal game state. Further, a period in which the normal symbol is in the time saving state in the normal game state is referred to as a time saving game state. Note that the above-mentioned “normal symbol time-saving state” is always set when the state is the probable change state, and is set only when the time-saving game state is set when the probability is low.

  When the "big hit B" or "big hit D" is reached, the game mode shifts to a special game state (4R big hit) with four rounds. In the case of "big hit B", as the added value after the big hit, the game state shifts to the certain change game state from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit D", a time-saving gaming state is provided as a value added after the big hit is completed from the end of the big hit until the special symbol changes 100 times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol is a big hit, it is difficult to determine the type of the big hit from the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the jackpot is a 16R jackpot or a four-round jackpot, and the player is interested in whether the jackpot game will continue after the fourth round during the jackpot game. You can play games. In addition, the jackpot type of the jackpot game is set to four round jackpots and 16 round jackpots, and a notification mode indicating that there is a branch point in the fourth round indicating whether or not the jackpot game is continued is displayed side by side. It is configured to be displayed on the device 901. With such a configuration, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot game without notifying the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot (when the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same time), Even if an effect indicating whether or not the jackpot game is to be continued in the fourth round is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is not confused without knowing what the effect means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game easily.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot types of 4 rounds and 16 rounds are set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot types such as 3 rounds and 7 rounds are appropriately set, and the player continues the round in the jackpot game. You can increase opportunities to be interested in whether or not. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds is set to 16, but is not limited thereto, and may be larger than 16 rounds. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is configured to be opened once per round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured such that the switching timing is difficult to understand. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 does not report the current number of rounds, and the player plays the game with the expectation that the jackpot game (the game with the specific winning opening 65a opened) will continue for a longer time. Can be driven. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily understand the game by providing a description that the side display device 901 has performed the opening a plurality of times in one round.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) according to the jackpot D) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed. For example, if the special symbol lottery results are "big hits A to D", a variable display in which the main symbols to which "0 to 9" is added are displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  Here, the expectation that the lottery result of the changing special symbol will be a big hit is notified by the color or pattern of the clothes of the character displayed in the small area Ds2. Normally, the color of the clothes is white, and the expectation of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of blue, red, and camouflage pattern (black and white camouflage pattern). In the case of the camouflage pattern, the player is notified that either the super reach or the special reach (see FIGS. 12B to 12D) is selected as the special pattern change pattern. It is set as a symbol to be performed. Further, when a language other than Japanese is set in the language setting, a flag pattern of a country corresponding to the language is set in place of the camouflage pattern. As a result, even a foreigner can easily recognize that the jackpot is highly expected. Further, when the character is displayed, the player can be more easily notified by displaying a display mode in which the expectation degree of the jackpot due to the color and pattern of the clothes is displayed as a percentage on the side display device 901 and explained. it can.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The language setting display mode (language setting screen) displayed on the side display device 901 will be described with reference to FIG. The side display device 901 is configured by a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type, and is configured to be display-controlled by a sub-display control device 900 provided in the pachinko machine 10 described later. As one of the display modes displayed on the side display device 901, a language setting display mode (see FIG. 5A) for setting a language used in the pachinko machine 10 is set.

  This language setting display mode is set to a default when the player presses the language switching icon 901e (see FIG. 5B) which is always displayed on the side display device 901 and when the power is turned on. Is set to be displayed when the language setting (Japanese in the present embodiment) is set. As shown in FIG. 5A, in the language setting display mode, a description of the language setting method is displayed in both Japanese and English at the top, and a representative language corresponding to each language is displayed below the description display. The national flag of the country is displayed, the language name of the language of the country is displayed next to the flag, and the language name in English is displayed in parentheses. Each language is listed and displayed in parallel in the vertical direction. The language setting display mode is composed of a plurality of pages. By switching and displaying the pages by the operation of the player, a list of languages that can be set can be changed and displayed.

  Here, in the state where the language setting display mode is displayed, the selection area t (the square display shown in FIG. 5A) indicating that the selection has been made by the touch operation is not displayed, and the player will By touching the language display area (the national flag and the country name (Japanese, English display section)), a selection area t is displayed for the touched language. When the language setting icon 901k is touch-operated in a state where the selection area t is not displayed, the language setting is not changed, and the display is switched to the game state.

  At the lower end of the display area of the side display device 901, a return icon 901n for switching the display page of the language setting display mode to the return direction is displayed at the left end, and a next icon 901m for moving the display page to the next direction is displayed at the right end. . Between the return icon 901n and the next icon 901m, a language setting icon 901k for setting and instructing the selected language is displayed.

  As a language switching operation performed by the player, a display portion corresponding to the language desired by the player (for example, if English is selected, the user touches a square region t shown in FIG. 5A). By operating, the language is selected. When it is in the selected state, as shown in FIG. 5A, a selection display mode (line indicated by the t region) displayed by a square line is displayed in the region of the selected language. When the switching in the selected language is determined, by touching the language setting icon 901k displayed at the lower end, the selected language (English in the example of FIG. 5A) is displayed. Is set.

  When the language setting icon is pressed, a normal display mode (specification information of the pachinko machine 10 in a standby state (see FIG. 5B), a display mode corresponding to a big hit in a big hit game). Can be switched to

  With reference to FIG. 5B, a description will be given of a specification display mode indicating specification information of the pachinko machine 10 displayed on the side display device 901. FIG. 5B is an example of a specification display mode displayed on the side display device 901. This specification display mode is set and displayed by the side display control device 900 when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state (a state in which the special symbol fluctuation display is not started for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment)). Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, in the specification display mode, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, a pachinko story) is displayed in the model name display area 901a. Below that, the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 (in the present embodiment, 1/400 in the normal game state (normal), 1/40 in the probable change game state) is displayed in the jackpot probability display area 901b. Below the big hit probability display area 901b, the number of payouts at the time of a big hit (in the present embodiment, 2400 pieces for a 16R big hit and 600 pieces for a 4R big hit) is displayed in the payout number display area 901c. The jackpot type selection ratio (in the present embodiment, jackpot A: 25%, jackpot B: 25%, jackpot C: 25%, jackpot D: 25%) is displayed below the payout number display area 901c. It is displayed in the area 901d. A language switching icon display area in which a language switching icon 901e is displayed is set below the jackpot ratio display area 901d.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, detailed specification information of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the side display device 901 when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state (demo state). Therefore, when selecting a model to play a game, the player can refer to the specification information displayed on the side display device 901 to make a selection.

  In the present embodiment, the content displayed in FIG. 5B as the specification information has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Points or the like may be displayed, or the results of the previous day's game (the number of difference balls, the number of big hits, etc.) may be displayed.

  Next, a normal display mode displayed on the side display device 901 in the normal game state (low-probability game state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A shows an example of a normal display mode when English is selected in the language setting. In the normal display mode, a schematic diagram of the game board 13 showing a method of playing a game by a player firing a game ball during the normal game state is displayed in the display area 901f. Then, the jackpot probability (in the present embodiment, the probability (the jackpot probability in Japanese setting): 1/400) in the case where the first ball entrance 64 is won during the normal game state is displayed. In addition, in the schematic diagram of the game board 13 displayed in the normal display mode, the characters “shoot point!” (In Japanese setting, the firing position!) Indicating the position at which the player fires the game ball to reach it. Is displayed, and the characters "here! (In Japanese setting, aim for this!)" Indicating a position that is advantageous to the player by passing the game ball are displayed. Also, in the upper display area 901g of the schematic diagram of the game board 13, a character of "Normal mode" is displayed to inform that the game state is the normal game state. Thereby, the player can easily play the game even during the normal game state.

  In the present embodiment, the position at which the game ball is fired is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 51 may be notified. Here, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rotation operation amount may be notified, or only the rotation operation amount may be notified.

  In the present embodiment, the schematic diagram of the game board 13 is configured to be simply displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a player performs a touch operation on the schematic diagram, a description of a portion corresponding to the touched position is provided. May be displayed. For example, when a touch operation is performed on the first entrance 64, the ball is entered into the first entrance 64, so that a lottery of a special symbol is performed, or when the ball is entered while the special symbol is changing. May be configured to display that up to a maximum of four balls are stored as reserved balls. Also, in the portion corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 of the schematic diagram, the same effect as the content displayed on the actual third symbol display device 81 is displayed, or only the third symbol is displayed. Then, the configuration may be made so that the lottery result of the special symbol can be determined even while watching the side display device 901. With such a configuration, by looking at the side display device 901, the result of the lottery of the special symbol is missed, or an effect with a low selection rate (an effect with a high value for a player with a high expectation of jackpot) is missed. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot expectation degree of the announcement effect, and the like may be displayed in a normal display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a description will be given of a display mode at the time of probability change displayed on the side display device 901 during the probability change game state. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example of the probable change display mode. In the probable change display mode, during the probable change game state, a schematic diagram of the game board 13 showing a game method performed by the player firing the game ball is displayed in the display area 901f. In the schematic diagram, the position at which the game ball is fired is displayed as “shoot point!”. In addition, as a diagram indicating a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, it is displayed as “1st step” indicating that a game ball is passed through the through gate 67, and an electric motor attached to the first entrance 64. The character "2nd step" indicating that the accessory is opened is displayed. By thus showing the schematic diagram, the player can easily recognize that the electric accessory is opened by passing the game ball through the through gate 67 during the probable change game. In the schematic diagram, the jackpot probability (1/40 in the present embodiment) when the first ball entrance 64 is won during the probability change game is displayed as "probability: 1/40". In addition, in the display area 901g, a character "Special mode" indicating the current game state (probable change game state) is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the game method, the jackpot probability, and the like during the probability change game.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game in which a new fluctuation is not started for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) is not performed, a demo screen such as a description of the game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Was configured as follows. This demo screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player starts a game and a new change is started, and the player performing the game is not notified of the game method. Further, even if an attempt is made to display a display mode explaining the game method during the game, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol and the effect mode, and there is no space for display. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a side display device 901 is provided separately from the third symbol display device 81, and a game method in the state where the player is playing the side display device 901 is in the gaming state. (A game method that is most advantageous to the player in the current game state) is displayed. Therefore, the player can check the correct game method on the side display device 901 while enjoying the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the side display device 901 is configured to display the game method and the like during the probability change game. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. You may comprise so that the continuation rate of a game may be displayed. Further, a variation pattern (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probable change game may be displayed on a portion corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 shown in the schematic diagram, or a third symbol. May be displayed. Also, the side display device 901 may be configured to display the game method, the current game state, and the jackpot probability in the same manner as in the probability change game state and the normal game state during the time saving game.

  Next, a jackpot display mode displayed on the side display device 901 during a jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot display mode when Japanese is set as the language setting. In the jackpot display mode, a “big hit 3R” indicating the current jackpot game state and the current number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed in the display area 901g. In the display area 901f, a schematic diagram of the game board 13 is displayed, and a game method during a jackpot game is shown. In the display area 901h, a commentary on the effect during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  In the schematic diagram of the game board 13 displayed in the display area 901f, a recommended launch position of a game ball is notified (displayed with a letter of “launch position”). In addition, a notification that a game is played so that a game ball is awarded to the specific winning opening 65a is notified (a diagram imitating the specific winning opening 65a is displayed with the letters “Aim here”). ).

  With such a configuration, even a player who plays a game for the first time can easily recognize the way of playing the game at the big hit by the big hit display mode displayed on the side display device 901.

  In the jackpot explanation displayed in the display area 901h, a description of the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the third symbol indicating the special symbol jackpot is displayed in a double-row pattern, it is difficult to determine the jackpot type from the symbol or the effect. The first symbol display device 37 is configured to display the jackpot type. However, the first symbol display device 37 is informed by lighting of the LED, so that it is difficult to determine the jackpot type. Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, a treasure design is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby notifying the player that the jackpot game will be continued after the fifth round. Thereby, the player can determine that the jackpot type is the 16 round jackpot. Further, in the first to third rounds, an effect indicating whether or not treasure is displayed in the fourth round is displayed.

  Here, it is difficult for a player or the like who has played a game for the first time to understand the meaning of the display mode related to treasure displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game. Further, it is difficult to understand the meaning of not informing the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot. However, in the present embodiment, as a jackpot commentary on the side display device 901, if a treasure is displayed on the main liquid crystal in the fourth round (corresponding to the third symbol display device 81), the round will continue even after the fifth round. Indicated by Therefore, depending on the jackpot display mode displayed on the side display device 901, the player can determine whether the jackpot type is a 4-round jackpot or a 16-round jackpot by proceeding with the jackpot game (specifically, in the fourth round). ) Can be recognized. In addition, the content of the big hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily understood.

  In addition, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, the continuation rate (50% in the present embodiment) of the probable change game is displayed in a jackpot display mode, or the scroll display is performed so that a large amount of other information is displayed. May be. In addition, each information is simply displayed, and when the player touches the display area, detailed information is displayed in a display area larger than the display area where the simple information was displayed. You may comprise.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7B to 7C, a preview symbol displayed in the display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the special symbol (third symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81, the display area is displayed before the lottery result is notified by the special symbol. An effect that indicates a lottery result by displaying a preview symbol (in the present embodiment, a boy character symbol) on Ds2 is executed. More specifically, a character as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C is displayed, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot is notified by the color or pattern of the character's clothes.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a preview character in the case of a camouflage-style outfit having the highest expected jackpot when Japanese is set in the language setting. In this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, characters of blue and red clothes are set, and the big hit expectation is set in the order of blue and red. The camouflage pattern shown in FIG. 7B is set to have a higher degree of expectation than a character set with red clothes.

  FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a character displayed as the design of the character with the highest expectation when Danish is set in the language setting. As shown in FIG. 7C, when the Danish language is set, the pattern of the Danish flag is displayed on the clothes of the character. The character with the national flag pattern is displayed in place of the camouflage pattern when Japanese is set, and the character with the camouflage pattern is configured not to be displayed when a character other than Japanese is set. ing. When a language other than Japanese is set, a character with a national flag pattern of that country is set as the pattern of the clothes with the highest expectation.

  With such a configuration, even if a foreigner does not understand the meaning of the camouflage pattern or the like, the jackpot expectation can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. With the configuration in which the jackpot expectation is notified by the color of the clothes, the display mode (in the present embodiment, the national flag pattern) in which the pattern of the clothes is different is set higher than that of the character in which the color of the clothes is changed. The player can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation is high.

  In the present embodiment, when Japanese is set, the pattern with the highest expectation is assumed to be a camouflage pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another pattern such as a leopard pattern may be used. You may be comprised so that the character of "heat" or "chance" may be displayed. Further, even when a foreign language is set, other patterns and characters may be displayed instead of the flag pattern.

  In addition, the side display device 901 may be configured to display a comment on the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to each preview symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 5-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state reset switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol big hit is set by a first random number table (see FIG. 11B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number which is the big hit set in the first hit random number table (see FIG. 11B), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table (refer to FIG. 11B) is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a probability that the special symbol will be a big hit from the low probability. For high-probability times (periods in the high-probability state of special symbols), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each type is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table for high probability of special symbols (see FIG. 11B) and the first random number table for low probability of special symbols (see FIG. 11B) are mainly It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. In the first random number table 202a, a large hit determination value at the time of low probability (at the time of the normal game state) and a large hit determination value at the time of high probability (at the time of the probable change game state) are set. “0” is set as the determination value at the time of low probability, and “0 to 29” is set as the determination value at the time of high probability. Here, the judgment value at the time of the high probability includes “0” which is the judgment value at the time of the low probability, and is set as the judgment value that is a big hit at the time of the low probability and at the time of the high probability. Thereby, the pre-reading process (the process of determining whether or not a big hit occurs when the first entrance is won) is configured to be easy.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table for the low probability (FIG. FIG. 11B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability (see FIG. 11B). See). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11B) and the first random number table for high probability (FIG. (Refer to (b)), the random number value to be a jackpot is an overlapped value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A random number value to be a jackpot may be set so as not to be a duplicated value. . Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 11C, the first hit type selection table 202b sets a determination value corresponding to each big hit type. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 24” is “big hit A”. When the value is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is “big hit B”. When the value is “50 to 74”, the jackpot type is “big hit C” and the value is “75”. If it is "-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot D".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the four types of hits (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, and big hit D) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured. The random number value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "complete departure" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 30) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table (see FIGS. 12B to 12D) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the main controller 110. In the ROM 202.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12B) and a deviation variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12C). And a deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D). Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table and the like in the time-saving gaming state are also set.

  With reference to FIG. 12B, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). With respect to the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. Is selected from the change pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (the fluctuation time) is set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type and obtains it from the out-of-office (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be released when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal game state is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from being prolonged at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot is prolonged from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur and the player feels bored.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types other than those described above may be set as the types of the variation patterns.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 11D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the winning set in the second winning random number table (see FIG. 11D), it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. The second random number table (see FIG. 11D) is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a probability of a normal symbol being hit from the low probability. There are two types, one for high-probability times (a period in which the symbol is usually in a time-saving state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  Here, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11 (d), the second random number table 202c has 24 random number values which are the hits of the ordinary symbol when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, and the range is "5-28". . These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11D). As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11D, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11D). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. , A time saving medium counter 203f, a prefetch certainty changing counter 203g, and a counter buffer 203h.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / failure, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. No (S603: No in FIG. 27).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol). At the timing when the jackpot game ends, if the type of the jackpot executed is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1011: Yes in FIG. 31), it is set to ON in the process of S1012 in FIG. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the flag is set to off. If a power failure occurs, the power is backed up, and when the power is turned on again, the state is restored to the state before the power failure.

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to zero, and the main controller 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is set. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the number of the time-saving time counter 203f.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the jackpot type is “big jackpot C” or “big jackpot D”, the during-hours counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014 in FIG. 31). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol fluctuation effect ends until the value of the counter 203f during working hours is 0 (S215 in FIG. 23).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203f during time saving is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a second random number table for high probability time (see FIG. 11D) On the other hand, if the value of the counter for medium time savings 203f is 0 while the lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed, the random number of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the second random number table for the low probability time (see FIG. 11D). A lottery is performed (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 26).

  The pre-reading probable changing flag 203g is used when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the special symbol lottery result based on winning data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) acquired according to the starting winning. The winning data may be analyzed as being in the probable change state (special symbol high probability state), or the winning data may be analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). This is a flag indicating whether to do so.

  When the pre-reading probable changing flag 203g is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the prefetch certainty changing flag 203g is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched.

  The counter buffer 203h is a buffer used when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes a control process.

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which various flags and counters necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10 are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern table 222a and an audio language storage area 222b. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, , A power-off processing flag 223e, a voice language storage area 223f, and a selected language flag 223g.

  The variation pattern table 222a is a data table for selecting more detailed variation pattern contents based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Specifically, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set for each of the rough types such as the normal reach, and one variation pattern is set based on a predetermined selection lottery executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The content is determined.

  The audio language storage area 222b stores audio data output from the audio output device 226. In the voice language storage area 222b, each voice corresponding to each language that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 is set. Specifically, voices of the same language are stored at consecutive addresses. All voice data corresponding to one language is stored in a continuous address area, and voice data corresponding to the next language is set after the final address. The order in which the voice data is stored is the same for each language. That is, at the address obtained by adding the same address from the head address where the voice of each language is stored, voice data indicating the same content but different language is stored.

  For example, for each audio data set corresponding to the variation pattern, difference address data of the audio data to be output for each variation pattern and its output timing are set. The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 outputs, as output data, audio data stored at an address obtained by adding the address indicated by the difference address data from the head address in the audio language storage area 222b corresponding to the language indicated by the selected language flag 223f. Set. As a result, even in a configuration in which a plurality of languages can be switched, it is possible to easily output the sound of the corresponding language only by changing the start address.

  In the present embodiment, the method of selecting audio data is described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A command corresponding to each language is set, and audio data of the corresponding language is selected based on the command. It may be. The audio data may be configured to be stored in a dedicated ROM and set.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1309 in FIG. 34). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 33). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1306 in FIG. 34), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1407 in FIG. 35). When the stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON, a process of stopping the special symbol is executed.

  The power-off processing flag 223e is a flag that is set to on when power-off occurs, and that is set to off in the processing of S1217 after the power-off processing (S1216 in FIG. 33) is executed. is there. That is, the power-off processing flag is a flag indicating that the power-off processing (S1216 in FIG. 33) executed when the power-off occurs is being executed. At the next power-on, it is determined whether the power-off processing flag 223e is on (S1102 in FIG. 32), and the power is completely cut off before the power-off processing (S1216 in FIG. 33) is completed. It can be determined whether or not it has been done.

  The selected language flag 223f is a flag indicating a language used in the pachinko machine 10. In the selected language flag 223f, a dedicated flag is set corresponding to each language used in the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to determine which language is set in the pachinko machine 10 by the selected language flag 223f. As for the selected language flag 223f, when a language setting command is received from the sub display control device 900, a flag corresponding to the language indicated by the received command is set to ON (S1319 in FIG. 34). The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 determines the language selected based on the selected language flag 223f for the language of the audio output from the audio output device 226 when executing a variation pattern or various processes, and outputs The voice data to be output is set so that the voice of the corresponding language is selected and output from the voice language storage area 222b stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The other memory area 223z is an area in which counters, flags, data, and the like necessary for each control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are stored.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 34) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  The sub-display control device 900 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the side display device 901, and receives a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, information input from the side display device 901, a setting switch 301, a GPS 302, a camera 303, The display control of the side display device 901 is executed based on information input from the human sensor 304. Further, a process of outputting a command indicating information on the set language and the like to the audio lamp control device 113 is also executed. Details of the sub display control device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28). In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (see FIG. 15) by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the instruction pointer 231a to the program. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address in the storage area 233a. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see FIG. 36 (FIG. 36 (b)) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1901 in FIG. 36 (b)) stored in the program storage area 233a. The start address of the program corresponding to (b) S1902) is set.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, a display language data storage area 234d2 and a display advance data storage area 234d3 are set in the NOR ROM 234d of the character ROM 234, respectively. In the display language data storage area 234d2, character data (comment display, game explanation, notice of characters, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a settable language. In detail, each character data is sequentially set for each address in a continuous address for one language, and after the character data for all the one language, character data corresponding to the next language is set for each address in a continuous address. Is set. The contents of the character data set for each language are the same.

  Specifically, it is assumed that the character data “Good morning” is stored at the head address where the Japanese character data is stored, and the character data “Goodbye” is stored at the next address. Thus, one or more addresses are specified and stored for each character data group to be displayed. The head address where the English character data is stored stores the character data “Good morning”, and the next address stores the character data “Good bye”. With this configuration, even if the language is switched, the head address of the language is changed, and character data is selected based on a difference address (address addition data) similar to other languages. Character data can be selected. Therefore, the control processing load when switching languages can be reduced.

  All the character data stored in the display language data storage area 234d2 are transferred to the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 48A, S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 described later. The processing is transferred to the display language data storage area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 by the processing of S3505 in FIG. 48 (b), S3402). In the case of transfer, the same address is designated and transferred to the display language data storage area 235f. As a result, characters can be quickly displayed in the language set after the power is turned on, and the player can easily play the game.

  In the present embodiment, the character data in the display language data storage area 234d2 is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character data may be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. With such a configuration, the control load at the time of initial startup can be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, all the language data is configured to be transferred. However, only the representative language (a part of the stored language) is configured to be transferred, and the language is switched to the language not transferred. In the case where is set, a configuration may be adopted in which the transfer is performed to reduce the transfer time. In addition, in each language, a setting is made so that only a character data portion required at a minimum at the initial stage (setting of language switching, etc.) is transferred, and when language switching is executed, all character data of the language are executed. May be configured to be transferred.

  In the display advance data storage area 234d3, character advance data corresponding to each language is stored for the character advance as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C. Regarding each notice data stored in the display notice data storage area 234d3, the resident image transfer setting processing (FIG. 48A, S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 described later. The processing is transferred to the display notice data storage area 235g of the resident video RAM 235 by the processing of S3506 in FIG. 48 (b), S3402).

  Note that, similarly to the character data stored in the display language data storage area 234d2, the data may be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only part of the advance notice data is transferred, and the advance notice data is transferred based on language switching. Alternatively, the transfer may not be performed at the time of initial setting, but may be performed when language switching is performed.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and outputs one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1903 and S1904 in FIG. 36B).

  Here, a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) will be described. The power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. FIG.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", display the "○" image for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", stop the "X" image and stop the variable effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the “O” image and the “X” image are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet are illustrated. The image data corresponding to the main symbol including the attached symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The display language data storage area 235f is a storage area in which character data corresponding to each language displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. As described above, in the display language data storage area 235f, an address area is set for each language, and character data indicating the same contents in the same order is stored for each language in the address area. Therefore, even when language switching is performed, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 only sets the head address corresponding to the language and uses the same difference address data (addition address data) as in other languages. Character data indicating similar contents can be selected.

  The display notice data storage area 235g is a storage area in which display data of character notice patterns as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C stored in the display notice data storage area 234d3 are transferred and stored for each language. It is.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, and a language setting flag 233m.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110; This area stores transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B , Jackpot C or jackpot D, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player cannot recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the fluctuation effect.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 20 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 21) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above-described power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 36B) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1905 in FIG. 36B). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. This is set to off (see S3807 in FIG. 48B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2201 in FIG. 38B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 38B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 38B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 38 (b) (see S2209). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 39 to 44) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 45 to 46) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 48A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 47) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 21), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 21, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3107 of FIG. 45). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1902 in FIG. 36B) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3613 in FIG. 49). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3614 in FIG. 49). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3702 in FIG. 50).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38B) is executed, it is performed (see S3702 of FIG. 50).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The language setting flag 233m is a flag for storing the language indicated by the language setting command output from the sub display control device 900. The sub-display control device 900 sends a language setting command indicating the language to the display control device 114 based on the case where the language is set on the language setting screen or based on the setting of the language used in the pachinko machine 10 by the initial setting. Output to The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 that receives the language setting command switches the language displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the notice display mode, and the like to a display mode adapted to the language and displays the same. As described above, the head address of the display language data storage area 235f is set based on the language set in the language setting flag 233m, and character data to be displayed is selected according to the difference address set in the display data table. I do. Therefore, the display control device 114 can switch the language display only by changing the start address, and can simplify the display processing.

<Electrical Configuration of Sub Display Control Device 900>
Next, an electrical configuration of the sub-display control device 900 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sub display control device 900. The sub display control device 900 includes an MPU 261, a work RAM 263, a character ROM 264, a resident video RAM 265, a normal video RAM 266, an image controller 267, an input / output port 268, an input / output port 269, and a bus line 270. , 271.

  The input side of the input / output port 268 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input / output port 268 is connected to the MPU 261, the work RAM 263, the character ROM 264, and the image controller 267 via a bus line 270. ing. A resident video RAM 265 and a normal video RAM 266 are connected to the image controller 267, and an input / output port 269 is connected via a bus line 271. A side display device 901 is connected to the output side of the input / output port 269. The input / output port 268 has a setting switch 301 for setting whether or not to execute language setting based on the position information of the GPS 302, and a position switch for determining the position data of the place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. A GPS 302, a camera 303 for acquiring image data of the player, a human sensor 304 for determining whether or not a player is in front of the pachinko machine 10, and a sensor for detecting the launch of a game ball. The firing sensors 305 are respectively connected.

  Here, the MPU 261, the work RAM 263, the character ROM 264, the resident video RAM 265, the normal video RAM 266, the image controller 267, the input / output port 268, the input / output port 269, the bus The lines 270 and 271 are the same as those already described for the display control device 114, and the set data and stored data are different. Therefore, the differences will be described.

  The NAND flash memory 264 a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 264, and stores most control programs executed by the MPU 261 and fixed value data for driving the side display device 901. It has at least a second program storage area 264a1 and a language selection table 264a2 in which a language corresponding to the position data is set when executing a language setting based on the position data of the GPS 302.

  The resident video RAM 265 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 264 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on image area 265a, the error message image area 265b, and the display language data are used. At least a storage area 265c is provided.

  The power-on main image area 265a stores a power-on image (“Loading Now”) displayed on the side display device 901 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is stored. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the character "").

  The error message image area 265b is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10.

  The display language data storage area 265c is a storage area in which character data corresponding to each language displayed on the side display device 901 is stored. As described above, an address area is set for each language in the display language data storage area 265c, and character data indicating the same contents in the same order for each language is stored in the address area. Therefore, even when language switching is performed, the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 sets only the start address corresponding to the language, and uses the same addition data (difference data) as in the other languages. Can be selected.

  The work RAM 263 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 264 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 261 executes various control programs. Be composed. As shown in FIG. 17, the work RAM 263 includes a program storage area 263a, a data table storage area 263b, a simple image display flag 263c, a display data table buffer 263d, a transfer data table buffer 263e, a pointer 263f, a drawing list area 263g, The display control device 114 includes a counter 263h, a stored image data determination flag 263i, and a drawing target buffer flag 263j. In the work RAM 263 (see FIG. 17), a specification information storage area 263k, a state storage area 263m, a state flag 263n, a display language setting flag 263p, a language setting flag 263r, and a display language setting value storage area 263s are set. .

  The specification information storage area 263k stores the specification information of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the sub display specification information command output from the audio lamp control device 113. As the specification information, information notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, such as a jackpot probability and the number of prize balls, is set.

  The state storage area 263m is a storage area for storing a game state (a normal game state, a probable change game state, a time saving game state, a big hit start, a big hit end, and a demonstration). In the state storage area 263m, a game state is set by discriminating each command notified from the sound lamp control device 113.

  The state flag 263n is a flag indicating a timing at which a display mode corresponding to the gaming state is displayed on the side display device 900. The state flag 263n is set to ON when the game state is shifted or when the display mode is switched from the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) to a display mode corresponding to the game state. Note that this flag is set to off in the initial setting such as when the power is turned on.

  The display language setting flag 263p is a flag indicating the set language. The display language setting flag 263p is composed of 16 bits, and a set value (value) is set in advance for each language. When the language is switched, the display language setting flag 263p is set to a setting value corresponding to the language. The MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 is configured to set the start address of the display language data storage area 265c in accordance with the language set in the display language setting flag 263p. The character data is set by adding the difference address of the character data set in the sub display data table set from the set head address. With this configuration, the corresponding language can be displayed using the same sub-display data table even when the language is switched.

  The language setting flag 263r is a flag indicating that the language setting screen is displayed and the language setting is performed. When the language setting flag 263r is set to ON, a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is set to be displayed on the side display device 901, and the language is switched to be executable.

  The display language setting value storage area 263s stores information on the language (state before the switching is confirmed) selected by the player's touch operation when the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. Is an area where is stored. Thus, the language selected by the player on the language setting screen (FIG. 5A) can be determined. In the initial state when the power is turned on, no language information is set. As a result, the language setting screen (FIG. 5A) is displayed, and when the language setting icon 901k (see FIG. 5A) is pressed without selecting any language, the language being set is displayed. It is set so that it cannot be switched. Therefore, even when the player erroneously presses the language switching icon 901e, it is possible to return from the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) without switching the language.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 18, there are six sub display data tables A to F corresponding to each game state and a sub display data table corresponding to a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A). The display data table has been set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the sub display data table A is set, and the display mode shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on the side display device 901. When the MPU 261 sets the sub-display data table A, the display language sets the difference address of the character data set in the sub-display data table (equivalent to FIG. 19) by the display language setting flag 263p. By setting the character data added to the address, characters in the corresponding language are displayed.

  Here, in the sub-display data table A set in the normal game state, the specification information (lottery probability, target entrance, current game state, etc.) in the normal game state is displayed, and the game in the normal game state is displayed. The method is explained. Further, a display imitating the game board 13 is displayed, and the same effect as the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or only the third symbol is displayed at a position imitating the third symbol display device 81.

  A sub-display data table B is set corresponding to the certainty-changing game state. In the sub display data table B, the specification information, the game method, the current game state, and the like in the probable change game state as shown in FIG. 6B are displayed.

  A sub-display data table C is set corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. In the sub display data table C, the specification information, the game method, and the current game state in the time-saving game state are displayed.

  The sub-display data table D is set corresponding to the gaming state during the big hit (start of the big hit). In the sub-display data table D, a jackpot game method as shown in FIG. 7B, a description of the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the current round number, and the like are displayed.

  A sub display data table E is set corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the big hit. In the sub display data table E, a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot is displayed. Here, specifically, a notification is displayed that stops the launch of the game ball and waits for a while. At the end of the big hit, the game may be configured to notify the number of obtained payout balls, the game state after the big hit game, and the like.

  A sub display data table F is set corresponding to the demonstration state. In the sub-display data table F, as shown in FIG. 5B, specification information of the pachinko machine 10, a demonstration display for introducing the contents of the pachinko machine 10, and the like are displayed.

  In the sub display data table corresponding to the language setting screen (FIG. 5A), a sub display data table is set for each of a plurality of pages. In this sub-display data table, the display mode of the language setting as shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on the side display device 901.

  The contents of the sub display data table are the same as the display data table of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 19). Each sub display data table is stored in the data table storage area 263b.

  Further, the transfer data table and the drawing list used in the sub display control device 900 are the same as those of the display control device 114, and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The side display device 901 is a liquid crystal display device having a touch panel. When a touch operation is performed on the touch panel, the coordinate data is notified to the sub display control device 900.

  The setting switch 301 is a slide switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 3). The setting switch 301 is set to ON or OFF. If the setting switch 301 is set to ON, the language setting by the GPS 302 is not executed. When the power is turned on, the language setting screen is automatically set to Japanese. The display is set on the side display device 901.

  The GPS 302 is a sensor that can acquire position information (latitude, longitude). This GPS 302 is the same as that used mainly for car navigation and the like, and is a known GPS. A process of determining the installation location based on the position data acquired from the GPS 302 and setting the corresponding language is performed.

  The camera 303 is installed on the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The camera 303 is arranged so as to be able to photograph the upper body of the player who is in front of the pachinko machine 10. The camera 303 is constituted by a CCD camera, and is connected so as to output photographed image data to the sub display control device 900.

  The human sensor 304 is installed on the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The motion sensor 304 is a sensor for determining whether or not a player is on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and determines the motion of a person by infrared rays. When the movement of the person is determined, it is detected that there is a person.

  The firing sensor 305 detects the firing of a game ball, and is constituted by a gate-type magnetic sensor. It is provided at the exit portion of the firing rail (see FIG. 2) and is set to ON when a game ball passes.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A, a jackpot B, a jackpot C, or a jackpot D.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on, and when the big hit D occurs, the red LED, the blue LED, and the green LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S213), and this processing ends. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the process of S213, when the big hit control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the big hit effect starts on the third symbol display device 81. Is done.

  In the processing of S212, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the during-time counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the during-time counter 203f becomes 1 If this is the case (S214: Yes), the value of the mid-hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S215), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is executed in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed (acceptance / non-permission determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in step (1).

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

  When the probability change flag 203e is ON (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the process of S301 and the value for the high probability time Based on the per-random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 30 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, 30 random numbers “0 to 29” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol big hit, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and Then, based on the first probability random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with three random numbers stored in the first random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these, the special number is set. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the four types of special symbol big hits (big hits) are compared. A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D) determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R big hit, the change to the next big hit of the special symbol), and "25 to 49" If it is in the range, it is determined to be the jackpot B (4R jackpot, the probability of change until the next special jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 74", the jackpot C (16R jackpot, up to 100 changes of the special symbol) If it is within the range of "74 to 99", it is determined to be a big hit D (4R big hit, time saving up to 100 times fluctuation of the special symbol) (see FIG. 11C).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). In addition, the big hit types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. It should be noted that the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is as follows: the large hit fluctuation pattern table 202d1 in FIG. 12 (see FIG. 12B) and the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 in FIG. ), And the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D).

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for long time)”, “outside (for short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “special special reach” various types are defined. The variation patterns of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D are defined as various types of “normal reach”, various types of “super reach”, and various types of “special reach”.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. On the basis of this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to whether the vehicle is out of reach or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", out of reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (FIG. 30). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a starting win. This is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the free symbol holding area 203a in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the process of S406, the lottery of the special symbol is performed. , The type of stop (the type of big hit in the case of a big hit), and its variation pattern are predicted (S407).

  Here, if the prefetching certainty changing flag 203g is on, whether the special symbol is a big hit or not is determined by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the first random number table for high probability. The determination is made by comparing one by one with the 30 random numbers (hit values) stored in 202a. As described above, 30 random numbers “0 to 29” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol big hit, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 11B).

  On the other hand, if the prefetching certainty changing flag 203g is off, whether the special symbol is a big hit or not is determined by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the first random number table 202a for low probability. Is determined by comparing one by one with three random numbers (hit values) stored in the. As described above, three random numbers of “0 to 2” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the first random number. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 11B).

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type table, The jackpot type is determined from among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R big hit, the change to the next big hit of the special symbol), and "25 to 49" If it is in the range, it is determined to be the jackpot B (4R jackpot, the probability of change until the next special jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 74", the jackpot C (16R jackpot, up to 100 changes of the special symbol) If it is within the range of "74 to 99", it is determined to be a big hit D (4R big hit, time saving up to 100 times fluctuation of the special symbol) (see FIG. 11C).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the range, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is the out of reach mode. It is determined whether or not there is any. Here, if the prefetch certainty changing flag 203g is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the type of stop is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", it is determined that the vehicle is out of reach. On the other hand, if the prefetching certainty changing flag 203g is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the low probability stop type selection table. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is determined that the vehicle is out of reach.

  Next, a variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit). . In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, “variation of normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation of special reach” "Various patterns are defined, and the variation patterns of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D are defined as common" normal reach ", shared" super reach ", and shared" special reach ". As the fluctuation patterns of the hit / miss common use, various types of “normal reach” common use, various “super reach” common use, and various “special reach” common use are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  When the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrongness, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information in the winning information storage area 223a as winning information. It is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous announcement effect.

  After the winning information command is set in the processing of S408, it is determined whether the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the processing of S407 is a certain symbol change big hit (S409). If the lottery result predicted in the processing of S407 is a special symbol large hit (S409: Yes), the prefetching certainty changing flag 203g is set to ON (S410), the present processing is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing is performed. Return to On the other hand, if the lottery result predicted in the processing of S407 is not the probability change special hit of the special symbol (S409: No), it is determined whether the lottery result predicted in the processing of S407 is a special symbol time saving big hit (S411). If the lottery result predicted in the processing of S407 is a special symbol time saving big hit (S411: Yes), the prefetching certainty changing flag 203g is set to OFF (S412), the present processing ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. . On the other hand, if the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is not a special symbol time savings jackpot (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: S504). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours-time counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. During the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, but the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. By doing so, it is possible to suppress as much as possible a ball intended to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 can be prevented from entering the ball during the special symbol jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so it is acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 11D).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 is set to the low value. Based on the second random number table 202c for probabilities, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not a normal symbol has been won (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 11D).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512), and when it is determined that it is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is being hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S515). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not in the special jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the processing of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S519). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The display change time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the processing of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, and the passage of the ball is determined. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending the acquired value.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S603: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S810 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S810 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S915 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S810). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S811, S812).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S811 and S812) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S813.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S804). S8907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S813, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S908 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S911 and S912 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) and the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a specification information command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S210 or the process of S211 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is finished, the first symbol display device is updated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26). (Lit display).

  Next, a specification information command is set (S908). This specification information command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of specification information such as the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 and the number of award balls set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. . As described above, since the specification information is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 every 4 ms by the main process (FIG. 30), the audio lamp control device 113 can periodically check the specification information. Therefore, when the power interruption occurs only in the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the sub-display control device 900, the specification information can be promptly confirmed after the restoration, and the specification held by the noise can be confirmed. Even when an abnormality occurs in the information data, the data can be changed to data corresponding to the correct specification information.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S909). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S909: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S910). If the predetermined time has already passed (S910: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the processes from S901 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S910: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S911, S912).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S911). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S912).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S908 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S909, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S909: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 28 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S913 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S913), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S914). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S915), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S916), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S909 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S908 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S911 and S performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S801). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening port) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S213 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all five rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1009, when it is the ending production start timing (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and thereafter, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1011). . When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1011: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is set to ON (S1012), and the process shifts to S1015. If it is determined in the process of S1011 that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B, that is, the jackpot C or the jackpot D (S1011: No), the probability change flag 203e is set to off (S1013), The value of the medium counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015. In the processing of S1015, the end of the jackpot is set, and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the process of S1009 (S1009: No), the process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-on processing in S1216 is performed (see FIG. 33) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1213 in FIG. 33), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1216. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1216 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1216 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1104. On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1216 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started by the user, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1102: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1216, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1106). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1216 (see S1215 in FIG. 33). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1216 is executed, the process of S1108 in the state where the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1216 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110). The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1108 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of step S1108 is performed via the process from step S1104 to step S1106. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process skips S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1110, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1110), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1111), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1109 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1104 to the process of S1108 via the process of S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1104. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1211 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1210. In the process of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S1202 to S1210 are mainly processes related to display (staging), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S1211, the variable display setting processing in S1212, and the processing for updating the counter value (not shown) executed after the processing in S1212 in a short cycle. By executing the step S1211 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the step S1212 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing is Based on this, it is possible to make settings relating to the fluctuation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1203 to S1212 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1202). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1208 described later (S1203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1204). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1207). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing (S1209), the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the language corresponding to each language set according to the setting is set. Sound is output from the audio output device 226. The sound editing / output processing (S1209) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After the processing in S1209, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1210), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1211, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1211). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1212, a variable display setting process is executed (S1212). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing in S1212, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1213). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1213 (S1213: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1215), and the power-off processing is executed (S1216). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1217), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1213 (S1213: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1214), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1214: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1214: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S1211). This command determination processing (S1211) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this processing, when a pending ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (S1211), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main controller 110 It is determined whether a command has been received (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1303). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 35) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Next, a sub-display change start command for notifying the change of the special symbol to the sub-display control device 114 is set (S1304). The sub-display change start command is configured to be able to determine information indicating the current game state.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1305). When the stop type command is received (S1305: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1306), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1307). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 35) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1305: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1308). Then, when the reserved ball count command is received (S1308: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309). In the process of S1309, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1309, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1309 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, after executing the processing of S1309, a configuration may be made so that a sub display reserved ball count command for notifying the reserved ball count is set to the sub display device 900. With this configuration, it is possible to display information on the number of reserved balls on the sub display device 901. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, an explanation of the reason or an explanation of how many times the lottery is executed by the reserved balls can be displayed.

  In the processing of S1308, when the command of the number of reserved balls is not received (S1308: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1310). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1310: Yes), winning information (such as determination of the hitting or non-holding ball and the variation pattern type) is extracted from the received winning information command and stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1311). After that, this processing ends.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1310 (S1310: No), it is determined whether a command related to the jackpot game has been received from the main control device 110 (S1312). The command related to the jackpot game corresponds to an opening command, a round command, an ending command, and the like. If it is determined that a command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1312: Yes), a process related to the jackpot corresponding to the received command is executed (S1313), and the received command is sent to the sub display control device 900. A sub display jackpot command for notifying the jackpot information to be indicated is set (S1316). The sub display jackpot command is notified of the number of rounds, the jackpot type, and the like. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1312 that a command related to the jackpot game has not been received (S1312: No), it is determined whether a command indicating the specification information of the pachinko machine 10 has been received from the main control device 110 (S1315). ). The command indicating the specification information includes a jackpot game probability (at normal time, at the time of a certain change), a prize ball, the number of payout prize balls at the time of a big hit, model name information, a certain change rate, a rate of a big hit type, and the like. If it is determined that the command indicating the specification information has been received (S1315: Yes), a sub display specification information command for notifying the sub display control device 900 of the content of the received specification information is set. (S1316). After that, this processing ends. As described above, the main control device 110 uses the spec information command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the spec information of the pachinko machine 10 in the process of S908 (executed every 4 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 30). Set. Therefore, the specification information can be received from main controller 110 at predetermined intervals. Therefore, when the power failure occurs only in the sound lamp control device 113, when the stored specification information is erased due to the power failure occurring only in the sub-display control device 900, or when noise is generated. Even when an error occurs in the specification information, correct specification information can be stored.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1315, when it is determined that the specification information command has not been received (S1315: No), it is determined whether a language setting command has been received from the sub display control device 900 (S1317). If it is determined that the language setting command has been received (S1317: Yes), the selected language flag 223f corresponding to the language indicated by the received command is set to ON (S1318). A display language setting command for notifying the display controller 114 of the set language is set (S1319). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1317 that the language setting command has not been received (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1320), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1212). The variable display setting process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1406. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then, in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 34), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After the data has been shifted, the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the processing of S1406, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1406). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1406: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1407), and then, in the process of S1307 of the command determination process (see FIG. 34), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1408). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1409). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the sound editing / output processing (S1209), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the contents of the sound editing / output processing (S1209).

  In the sound editing / output processing (S1209), first, it is determined whether or not sound output is set (S1501). The sound output is set when a fluctuation pattern is set or when an error or a demonstration is set. Here, in the audio output setting, an output timing and a difference address (addition address) of the audio data to be output are set. If it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the audio output setting has not been made (S1501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the audio output setting has been made (S1501: Yes), the top address corresponding to the set language is set based on the language selection flag 223f (S1502). A difference address corresponding to the audio data set to be output is set (S1503). The audio data stored in the address obtained by adding the difference address set in S1503 from the head address set in the processing in S1502 is selected from the audio language storage area 222b (S1504). The selected audio data is set to the audio output device 226. The audio output device 226 is set by designating the output timing of the set audio. Thereby, the audio output device 226 can output the set audio data based on the designated timing.

<Control processing executed by display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1901), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2002, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2002, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2003). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2004), the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the boot processing (see S1901 in FIG. 36B) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be executed later (see S1902 in FIG. 36B) (S2005), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1901) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 37, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2002. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2003 to S2005 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred in the process of S2001 transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2001. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2002 and S2002, the processing of S2003 to S2005 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2003 to S2005 without performing the processes of S2001 and S2002. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1903). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1903, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1904). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1904, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 48A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 48A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 38B) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. 38 (b) (S2208) and simple display setting processing (see S2209 in FIG. 38 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. In the case where the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image (the image of “「 ”or“ x ”) is immediately displayed during the change effect period, and It can perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1905, interruption permission is set (S1906), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1906, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 38B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2202) is executed to cause the display device 81 to display, and then a display setting process (S2203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2202), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interruption process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2203), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2202) and the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2203) is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2204). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2203) or the simple display setting process (S2209). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2206). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2204), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2205) are used. 21. The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2207). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, miss reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command, The stop symbol is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2201: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2208) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2209) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2204.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2202), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (S2202), as shown in FIG. 39, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2301), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2301: No), the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2302). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the types of the commands are analyzed (S2303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2305), and returns to the process of S2301.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2305) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. The fluctuation pattern command processing (S2305) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process (S2305), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2403, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2401, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2404), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2406), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2405, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2401 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2402. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2404, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2304: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2306). If there is a display variation type command (S2306: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2307), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A to jackpot D, miss reach, or complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2501), and the stop is performed. The type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B) is executed, and the value after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared. A stop symbol is finally set (S2502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2503).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2502. In the above-described task process (S2204), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2503, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. In the process of S2306, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2306: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2308). If it is determined that there is an opening command (S2308: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2309). After that, the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the opening command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command processing (S2309). The opening command process (S2309) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command processing (S2309), first, an opening display data table corresponding to the opening pattern indicated by the opening command is determined, the determined opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S2601).

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Next, time data corresponding to the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601 is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2605), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2308, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2308: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2310). If there is a round number command for use (S2310: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2311), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the round number command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command process (S2311). The round number command processing (S2311) executes processing corresponding to the round number command received from the audio ramp control device 114.

  In the round number command process (S2311), first, a display data table corresponding to the number of rounds and the jackpot type indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Here, if the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot C, that is, 16 rounds, a display data table in which treasure is displayed in the fourth round is set. On the other hand, if the jackpot B or the jackpot D, a display data table in which no treasure is displayed in the fourth round is set.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Next, time data corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2310, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2310: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S2312). If there is an ending command for use (S2312: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2313), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2313) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command process (S2313). The ending command process (S2313) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process (S2313), first, an ending image display data table corresponding to the jackpot type is determined, the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). ). Here, if the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, that is, if the jackpot is a jackpot, a display data table which is an ending display mode in which characters of “jacket rush!” Indicating transition to a jackpot game state is displayed. Is set. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot C or the jackpot D, a display data table of an ending display mode in which characters of “100 time savings” indicating transition to the time saving gaming state are set.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). Next, the time data corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2804). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are both turned off (S2805), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2312, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2312: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display language setting command among unprocessed commands (S2314). If there is a language setting command (S2314: Yes), language setting command processing is executed (S2315), and the process returns to S2301. Here, as the display language setting command, when the language setting is executed by the sub display control device 900, a command indicating the set language is output from the sub display control device 900.

  Here, the language setting command processing (S2315) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language setting command processing (S2315). In the language setting command process (S2315), a process of setting the language displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be switched to the language notified by the sub display control device 900 is executed.

  In the language setting command process (S2315 in FIG. 43), first, the language setting flag 233m corresponding to the language indicated by the received display language setting command is set to ON (S2901).

  The start address of the display language data storage area 235f corresponding to the language set in the processing of S2901 is set (S2902). The start address of the display advance notice data storage area 235g corresponding to the language set in the processing of S2901 is set (S2903).

  Here, when character data is set in each display data table, a difference address of the character data type is set. Based on the difference address, the character data stored at the address obtained by adding the difference address from the head address set in the processing of S2902 is selected from the display language data storage area 235f and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set. With this configuration, the language to be displayed can be switched using the same display data table even when the language is switched. Therefore, the display language can be switched with an easy configuration.

  Also, a difference address is set in the display data table for a character (see FIGS. 7B to 7C) which is a preview symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the address is set in the processing of S2903. By adding the character information from the display notice data storage area 235g, the notice character corresponding to the language can be selected. Therefore, even if the language is switched, the character can be switched in correspondence with the language using the same display data table.

  In the present embodiment, the character data and the preview character are configured to be selected by using the difference address. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated selection command or a selection table is used for each character data in each language. You may comprise so that it may select.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2314, if it is determined that there is no display language setting command (S2314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2316). If there is (S2316: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2317), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the error command processing (S2317) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the error command processing (S2317). This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3002), and the error command is set. The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3001, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S3002 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2318), and the processing returns to S2301.

  In the processing of S2301 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2302 to S2318 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2301 to S2318 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2301 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 40A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 40B), which are the processing corresponding to each command, for the other commands, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 40A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2401. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2402, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47, details of the above-described display setting process (S2203), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process (S2203), as shown in FIG. 45, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3101), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3101: No), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3102), and then S3103 to S3104. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3103). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process (S3104). This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3201).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters. In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3103: No), then the process proceeds to S3105.

  In S3105, a pointer update process is performed (S3105). Here, the details of the pointer update processing (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing (S3105). This pointer update processing (S3105) is based on the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively, from the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the transfer target image data. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which is acquired.

  In the pointer update processing (S3105), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3302). As a result, if it is the End information (S3302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3303). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3306), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 45, the description is continued. After the pointer update process (S3105), the display data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3106 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3108: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3109).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3109: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3110), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3111). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3114), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set in the process of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2204), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3115 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3109, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3109: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3116). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3117), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3118). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S3116, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3116: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d so as to set the display data table defining that the image (“O” image or “X” image) is to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2205), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. explain. First, FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process (S2205).

  In the transfer setting process (S2205), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3401, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

  In the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3501), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3501). S3501: Yes), and it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3502). In the process of S3502, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to S3503. Also, as a result of the process of S3501, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3503.

  In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S3503: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504). A transfer instruction to transfer the character data in the untransferred display language data storage area 234d2 to the display language data storage area 235f is set (S3505). Next, a transfer instruction is set to transfer the notice character data of the unsent display notice data storage area 234d3 to the display notice data storage area 235g (S3506). Thereafter, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402) ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3503, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3507), and the resident image transfer setting processing (S3402) ends. . Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2208 in FIG. 38B) and the simple display setting processing (see S2209 in FIG. 38B), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 44) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 45 to 47) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 49) (see S3401: No in FIG. 48A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3403).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S3105) of the previously executed display setting processing (S2203). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3603) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the processing shifts to S3605.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3602: No), the process of S3603 and S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. In the processing of S3605, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

  In the process of S3606, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3606 (S3606: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to S3607. Also, as a result of the processing in S3605, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3605: No), the processing shifts to S3607.

  In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607). If the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3608), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3613. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3609). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3609: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3609: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3610), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3611). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3612), and the process moves to S3613.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3609, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends as it is.

  In the processing of S3613, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3613). The determination in the processing of S3613 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3613, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3613: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3613, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3613: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3614). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3614, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3615), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the above-described drawing process (S2206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the rendering process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204) and parameters necessary for rendering each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), to generate a drawing list shown in FIG. 21 (S3701). That is, in the process of S3701, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 38B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

<Control Process Executed by Sub Display Control Device 900>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. The sub display control device 900 mainly performs display control of the side display device 901 and processing based on a touch operation on the side display device 901.

  With reference to FIG. 51, the main process (S4000) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing (S4000).

  In the main process (S4000), first, a boot process is executed (S4001). In this boot processing (S4001), the processing shown in FIG. 52 is executed. In this boot process (FIG. 52, S4001), the same processes as those in S2001 to S2005 performed in the boot process (FIG. 37, S1901) performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are performed. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 263a of the work RAM 263 (S4002). Specifically, the process is the same as the initial setting process (FIG. 36B, S1902) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 267 so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 265a of the resident video RAM 265 (S4003). The process of S4003 is the same as the process of S1903 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, but the character of "Loading Now" is displayed in the power-on image. Thereby, even if the player is a foreigner, it is possible to recognize that the screen is being widely initialized. For the power-on image, a storage unit capable of storing the language setting before the power is turned off is provided, and an image indicating the initial setting is displayed in a language corresponding to the language setting. You may.

  After the processing of S4003 is executed, the simple image display flag 263c is turned on (S4004). Thus, while the simple image display flag 263c is on, in the transfer setting process (FIG. 54B, S4505) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265. A resident image transfer setting process is performed to instruct the image controller 267 to transfer the image to the image controller 267 (see FIG. 60A, S5502).

  The simple image display flag 263c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 267 in the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 54B), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 54B) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. 54 (b) (see S4512) and simple display setting processing (see S4513 in FIG. 54 (b)).

  After the processing of S4004 is executed, a language initial setting processing is executed (S4005). The language initial setting process (S4005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of determining a language to be set when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

  Here, the language initial setting process (S4005) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language initial setting process (S4005). In the language initial setting process (S4005), first, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 301 is set to ON (S4301). The setting switch 301 is a slide switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and is used by the game store to set whether or not to execute language setting based on information from the GPS 302 when the power is turned on. It is.

  If it is determined that the setting switch 301 is set to ON (S4301: Yes), the current position data (GPS data) is read from the GPS 302 (S4302). It is determined whether the read data is a normal value (S4303). The determination as to whether or not this is normal is made by determining whether or not the position data does not actually exist (outside the position data set as settable). Also, when the position data cannot be read, it is determined that the position data is abnormal.

  In the process of S4303, if it is determined that the read position data is normal (S4303: Yes), the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to the language set from the language selection table 264a2 based on the position data read from the GPS 302. Is set (S4304). Here, the language is set in the language selection table 264a2 in correspondence with the position data of the GPS 302. Then, by storing the display language setting flag 263p as a value (flag) indicating the corresponding language, the language set in the initial setting can be determined.

  After the processing of S4304 is executed, a language setting command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the language indicated by the display language setting flag 263p is set (S4305). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, the position (latitude, longitude) at which the pachinko machine 10 is installed is automatically determined by the GPS 302, so that the language used at that location can be set. Therefore, it is possible to save the game shop from having to set the language every time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch 301 is off in the process of S4301 (S4301) or if the position data of the GPS 302 is abnormal in the process of S4301 (S4303: No), the process of S4307 is executed. I do. In the process of S4307, the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to the default language (Japanese in the present embodiment) preset in the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON (S4307). The language setting flag 263r is set to ON (S4308). After that, the processing of S4305 is executed. Here, when the language setting flag 263r is set to ON, a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed for the player or the game arcade to set a language. Therefore, the game can be set in the language desired by the game store or the player and the game can be started.

  As described above, when the setting switch 301 is set not to execute the language setting by the GPS, the language is set by default, and displayed on the side display device 901 so as to set the language switching. Therefore, the initial language can be set according to the situation of the game store (such as the customer base). Even when the data of the GPS 302 is not normal, the default setting is made and the setting screen is displayed, so that the game shop can determine that the data of the GPS 302 has an abnormality.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 261 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 263 (S4401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 will be described. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. This V interrupt processing (see FIG. 54 (b)) is different from the above-described V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in S4504, S4506 to S4507, and S4512 to The processing in S4513 is the same as the processing in S2204, S2206 to S2207, and S2208 to S2209, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 54B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 263c is on (S4501), and the simple image display flag 263c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has been completed, so that not the power-on image but the normal effect image is displayed on the side display device. A command determination process (S4502) is executed to cause the display 901 to display, and then a display setting process (S4503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4502), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. And a sub-display variation pattern command, the sub-display data table for displaying the specification information to be displayed at the time of the demonstration on the side display device 901 or the sub-display data table for displaying the game method is displayed. In addition to the setting in the table buffer 263d, the transfer data table corresponding to the set sub display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 263e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. This command determination processing (S4502) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4503), based on the contents of the sub display data table set in the display data table buffer 263d by the command determination process (S4502) and the like, the image of one frame to be displayed next in the side display device 901 is displayed. Specify the content specifically. In addition, the display mode to be displayed on the side display device 901 is determined according to the processing status or the like, and the sub display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 263d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the display setting process (S4503) is executed, a task process is executed (S4504). In this task processing, based on the content of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the side display device 901 specified by the display setting processing (S4503) or the simple display setting processing (S4513), the sprite constituting the image is displayed. The type of (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is performed (S4505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 263c is on, the image controller 267 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 from the character ROM 264 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 265. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 263c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 264 to the image controller 267 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 263e. A transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 266a of the video RAM 266 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4506). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4504), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S4505) are used. Then, a drawing list (similar to FIG. 21) is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 267 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 267 executes an image drawing process according to the drawing list.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the sub display control device 900 is executed (S4507). Next, a language setting process is executed (S4508). In the language setting process (S4508), a process of displaying a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) and setting a language based on a touch operation is performed. This language setting processing (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an input detection process is executed (S4509). In the input detection process (S4509), the touch operation of the side display device 901 connected to the sub display control device 900 is determined, and the process based on the touch operation is executed. This input detection processing (S4509) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a camera setting process is executed (S4510). In the camera setting process (S4510), image data captured by the camera 303 connected to the sub display control device 900 is read, face recognition is performed based on the image data, and language setting based on the recognition result is performed. Execute the process to be executed. This camera setting process (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a firing detection process is performed (S4511). In this firing detection processing (S4511), the processing of switching the display of the side display device 901 from the demonstration state to the explanation of the normal game method or the like is executed by determining the firing of the game ball. Details of the firing detection process (S4511) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the V interrupt processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4501 that the simple image display flag 263c is ON (S4501: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the side display device 901, a simple command determination process (S4512) is performed, then a simple display setting process (S4513) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4504.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58, details of the above-described command determination process (S4502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described. First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (S4502), first, as shown in FIG. 55, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4601: No), the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4601: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4602). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S4603).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a sub display specification information command among the unprocessed commands (S4604). If there is a sub display specification information command (S4604: Yes), the specification information command processing is performed. After execution (S4605), the process returns to S4601.

  Here, the specification information command processing (S4605) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the specification information command processing (S4605). The specification information command processing (S4605) executes processing corresponding to the sub display specification information command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the specification information command processing (S4605), first, the specification information indicated by the received sub display specification information command is compared with the specification information set in the specification information storage area 263k to determine whether there is a change in the specification information. (S4701). If it is determined that there is a change in the specification information (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the received specification information is normal (S4702). Here, the determination as to whether it is normal is made within the range of the set normal specification information. For example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot probability is within the range of the game rules.

  If it is determined that the received specification information is normal (S4702: Yes), the received specification information is stored in the specification information storage area 263k (S4703). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4701 that there is no change in the specification information (S4701: No), or if it is determined that the received specification information is abnormal in S4702 (S4702: No), the process ends.

  As described above, the specification information can be received at regular intervals from the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the sub-display control device 900 or when the data of the specification information stored due to noise or the like is generated. Even when an abnormality occurs, correct specification information can be set again.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S4604, if it is determined that there is no sub display specification information command (S4604: No), then it is determined whether there is a sub display variation start command among the unprocessed commands (S4606). If there is a variation start command for sub-display (S4606: Yes), the variation start command process is executed (S4607), and the process returns to S4601.

  Here, the details of the change start command processing (S4607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the change start command processing (S4607). This variation start command process executes a process corresponding to the sub-display variation start command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the change start command processing (S4607), first, the game state (one of the normal game state, the certain change game state, and the time saving game state) indicated by the sub-display change start command and the game state stored in the state storage area 263m. It is determined whether or not there is a change (whether they do not match) (S4801). If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state, the state flag 263n is set to ON (S4802). The game state indicated by the received sub-display change start command is stored in the state storage area 263 (S4803). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4801: No), this processing ends.

  As described above, the game state can be determined by the sub-display change start command output each time the special symbol changes from the sound lamp control device 114, so that the game state is switched and stored based on the change start. be able to. Therefore, the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 can also be changed in accordance with the transition of the gaming state.

  Referring back to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4606, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for sub-display (S4606: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot information command for sub-display among unprocessed commands (S4608). When it is determined that there is a sub-display jackpot information command (S4608: Yes), a jackpot information command process is executed (S4609). After that, the process returns to S4601.

  Here, the jackpot information command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot information command processing (S4609). The jackpot information command process (S4609) executes a process corresponding to the sub display jackpot information command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot information command processing (S4609), first, it is determined whether the jackpot information indicated by the sub-display jackpot information command is information indicating the jackpot ending (S4901). If it is determined that the information indicates the jackpot ending (S4901: Yes), the status flag 263n is set to ON (S4902), and the information indicating the end of the jackpot is set in the status storage area 263m (S4903). . After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received sub display jackpot information command is not information indicating a jackpot ending (S4901: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating a jackpot opening (start) (S4904). ). If it is determined that the command indicates the opening (S4904: Yes), the status flag 263n is set to ON (S4905), and information indicating the start of the jackpot is set in the status storage area 263m (S4906). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the received command is not information indicating the opening (S4904: No), the process ends.

  As described above, when the jackpot starts, the status flag 263n is turned on, so that the content of the side display device 901 can be switched to the jackpot start content set in the status storage area 263m and displayed. In addition, since the display can be switched even at the end timing of the jackpot, the player can easily recognize the start and the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, a jackpot explanation as shown in FIG. 7A is displayed on the side display device 901, but the display can be switched based on the start of the jackpot. Therefore, the big hit game can be explained to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the side display device 901 is switched at the opening timing. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit. It may be configured so as to switch to the big hit display based on the timing. With this configuration, the jackpot can be described before the start of the jackpot, and the player can easily play the game from the start of the jackpot.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4608, if it is determined that there is no sub-display jackpot information command (S4608: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4610). If there is (S4610: Yes), an error command process is executed (S4611), and the process returns to S4601. In this error command processing, the same processing as the error command processing (S2317 in FIG. 44) executed by the display control device 114 is executed, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S4610, when it is determined that there is no error command (S4610: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S4612), and the process returns to S4601.

  In the processing of S4601 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4601: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S4602 to S4612 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S4601 to S4612 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4601 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, details of the above-described display setting process (S4503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process (S4503), as shown in FIG. 59, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S5001). If the error occurrence flag is on (S5001: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S5002). This warning image setting process (S5002) is the same as the above-described warning image setting process (S3104 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the warning image setting process (S5002) or in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5003.

  In S5003, a pointer update process is performed (S5003). This pointer update processing (S5003) is the same as the pointer update processing (S3105 in FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the pointer update processing (S5003), the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 263f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the sub display data table set in the display data table buffer 263d (S5004). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S5004 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 263h is decremented by 1 (S5005). In the present embodiment, until a new sub-display data table is set, when the value of the time counter 263h becomes 0, the initial value is set to the initially set value. That is, the same display is repeatedly executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the language setting flag 263r is on (S5006). Here, when the language setting flag 263r is on, the language setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is being displayed, so that the display is not switched. If it is determined in step S5006 that the language setting flag 263r is ON, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5006, when it is determined that the language setting flag 263r is off (S5006: No), it is determined whether the status flag 263n is on (S5007). In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the status flag 263n is off (S5007: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the state flag 263n is on (S5007: Yes), it indicates that it is the timing at which the transition (switching) between the gaming state and the big hit state is performed. In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the status flag 263n is ON (S5007: Yes), the game status set in the status storage area 263m corresponds to the language indicated by the display language setting flag 263p. The sub display data table is selected from the data table storage area 263b and set in the display data table buffer 263d (S5008). Note that sub-display data tables A to F shown in FIG. 18 are set in the data table storage area 263b, and a gaming state (including a big hit state) when selected is set in each sub-display data table. ing.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 263e (S5009). Then, time data corresponding to the set time of the sub display data table is set in the time counter 263h (S5010), and the value of the pointer 263f is initialized to 0 (S5011). The state flag 263n is set to off (S5012), and thereafter, this processing ends.

  As described above, when the state flag 263n is set to ON, a new corresponding sub-display data table is set. Therefore, the display mode of the side display device 901 is switched to the content corresponding to the gaming state (including the big hit state). Can be. In the present embodiment, the type of the sub display data table is the type shown in FIG. 18, but is not limited thereto, and a type corresponding to various game states may be set. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting is made by selecting from a plurality of sub-display data tables.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S4505), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900. Will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process (S4505).

  In the transfer setting process (S4505), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 263c is on (S5501). If the simple image display flag 263c is on (S5501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has not been transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S5502), the transfer setting processing is completed, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. Accordingly, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 is set to the image controller 267. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5501, if the simple image display flag 263c is not on, that is, if it is off (S5501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is read from the character ROM 264 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 265. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 264 is performed to the normal video RAM 266. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4505) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5502).

  In the resident image transfer setting process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 267 (S5601). S5601: Yes), and it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 267 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S5602). In the process of S5602, after instructing the image controller 267 to transfer the image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 267, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5602 (S5602: No), the image controller 267 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5602: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S5603. Also, as a result of the process of S5601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 267 (S5601: No), the process proceeds to S5603.

  In the process of S5603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has been transferred (S5603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 267 is set to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 (S5604). A transfer instruction to transfer the untransferred character data in the display language data storage area 264d2 to the display language data storage area 265c is set (S5605).

  As a result, in the drawing process, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 267 includes the transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 267 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 266 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 264 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 265), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 265 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 267 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 264, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 267a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 266. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 266. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 261.

  As a result of the processing in S5603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S5603: Yes), the simple image display flag 263c is set to off (S5606), and the resident image transfer setting processing (S5502) ends. . Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 54 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S4512 in FIG. 54 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S4513 in FIG. 54 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 55 to 58) and the display setting process (see FIG. 59) are executed, the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the side display device 901. Is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 264 is performed to the normal video RAM 266 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S5501: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 261 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265. Then, the MPU 261 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 265 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 265 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 265 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is transferred to the resident video RAM 265, the sub-display control device 900 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 265 to perform image control. At 267, an image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 265, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 264 constituted by the NAND flash memory 264a having a low reading speed at the time of drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the side display device 901.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S5503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4505) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S5503).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 263f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 263e by the pointer update processing (S5003) of the previously executed display setting processing (S4503). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S5701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S5702: Yes), the character ROM 264 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 266) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 263 ( (S5703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 263 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S5704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5705.

  Also, in the processing of S5702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5702: No), the processing of S5703 and S5704 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S5705. In the process of S5705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 267 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S5705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S5705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 267 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5706).

  In the process of S5706, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 267 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 267, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5706 (S5706: No), the image controller 267 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5706: Yes), the process proceeds to S5707. Also, as a result of the processing of S5705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 267 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S5705: No), the processing shifts to S5707.

  In the process of S5707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5707). If the transfer start flag is on (S5707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S5708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S5703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S5709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5707: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S5709, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 266 (S5709). The determination in the process of S5709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 263i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the stored image data determination flag 263i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 266, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 266.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 266 as a result of the processing in S5709 (S5709: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 can be suppressed, the processing load on each unit of the sub display control device 900 can be reduced, and the traffic on the bus line 260 can be reduced. Can be achieved.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5709, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 266 (S5709: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5710). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 267 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 267 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 264 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 266), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 266a of the normal video RAM 266 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 267 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 264, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 266). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 261.

  After the processing in S5710, the stored image data determination flag 263i is updated (S5711), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 263i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 266a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub display data table is displayed in accordance with a command (for example, a sub display specification information command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Along with the setting in the buffer 263d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 263e. Then, the MPU 261 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 267 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 263f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 263e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 263d is surely transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 266a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started in accordance with the sub display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the image storage area 266a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When rendering a predetermined sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 265 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 266a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 264 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 264a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 264 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 266. The corresponding display mode can be displayed on the side display device 901 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 265 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 in sprite units, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the above-described language setting process (S4508), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the language setting process (S4508). In the language setting processing (S4508), display setting of a language setting screen, language selection processing by touch operation, and the like are executed.

  In the language setting process (FIG. 62, S4508), first, it is determined whether the language setting flag 263r is set to ON (S5101). The language setting flag 263r is a flag indicating whether or not the language setting screen is being displayed. If it is determined that the language setting flag 263r is off (S5101: No), the process is terminated because the language setting is not in a state of being executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the language setting flag 263r is on (S5101: Yes), the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device 901. Determine if there is. Here, whether or not the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed is determined by determining whether or not a sub-display data table for language setting is set in the display data table buffer 263d. .

  In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device 901 (S5102: Yes), the language display area on the display screen of the side display device 901 is changed. It is determined whether a touch operation has been performed (S5103). It should be noted that this determination is based on the sub-display data table in which the display information displayed at the coordinates at which the touch operation has been performed is determined, and is determined to be in the area indicating the language (in the t area in FIG. 5A). Determine. If it is determined that a touch operation has not been performed on the language display area (S5103: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the area indicating the language has been touch-operated (S5103: Yes), the setting value (information) indicating the language corresponding to the touch operation is stored in the display language setting value storage area, and the corresponding language is stored. Then, the display language pointer is set in the set sub display data table (S5104). After that, this processing ends. Here, in the process of S5104, the display language pointer sets a display (t region) indicating the language selected on the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) has not been set (S5102: No), the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device. In step 901, a sub display data table for display setting is set. After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, details of the above-described input detection processing (S4509), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this input detection processing (S4509). In this input detection processing (S4509), it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the touch panel of the side display device 901, and each processing or setting is executed based on the determination result.

  In the input detection process (FIG. 63, S4509), first, it is determined whether the language switching icon 901e (see FIG. 5B) has been pressed (S5201). Here, based on the coordinates at which the touch operation is performed, it is determined whether the coordinates are the set coordinates of the language switching icon 901e in the sub-display data table in which the coordinates are set. If it is determined that the language switching icon 901e has been pressed (S5201: Yes), the language setting flag 263r is set to ON (S5202). After that, the process of S5203 is executed. By turning on the language switching icon 901e, the language setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is set to be displayed on the side display device 901 in S5105 of the above-described language setting process (S4508 in FIG. 62). . On the other hand, if it is determined that the language switching icon 901e has not been pressed in the process of S5201 (S5201: No), the process of S5203 is executed.

  In the process of S5203, it is determined that the language setting icon 901k (see FIG. 5A) has been pressed. The language setting icon 901k is an icon displayed when the language setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on the side display device 901.

  If it is determined that the language setting icon 901k has not been pressed (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5208. On the other hand, if it is determined that the language setting icon 901k has been pressed (S5203: Yes), the language setting flag 263r is set to off (S5204). The display language setting flag 263p corresponding to the language stored in the display language setting value storage area 263s is set (S5206). The status flag 263n is set to ON (S5207). After that, the processing of S5208 is executed. Here, by setting the state flag 263n to ON, S5008 of the above-described display setting process (FIG. 59, S4503) is changed from the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) to a display mode based on the current game state. The display contents of the side display device 901 are switched.

  In the process of S5208, it is determined whether the next icon 901m on the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) has been pressed (S5208). If it is determined that the next icon 901m has not been pressed (S5208: No), the processing of S5210 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the next icon 901m has been pressed (S5208: Yes), the sub display data table corresponding to the next screen (next page) of the sub display data table of the set language setting screen is displayed in the display data table. It is set in the buffer 263d (S5209). After that, the process of S5210 is performed.

  In the process of S5210, it is determined whether the return icon 901n on the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) has been pressed (S5210). If it is determined that the return icon 901n has not been pressed (S5210: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5210 that the return icon 901n has been pressed (S5210: Yes), the previous one of the sub display data tables of the language setting screen currently set in the display data table buffer 263d. The sub display data table of the language setting screen corresponding to the page is set in the display data table buffer 263d (S5211). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, the language setting and the switching of the language setting screen can be performed by the touch operation of the side display device 900. Therefore, it is possible to switch to the language desired by the player by an easy operation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the above-described camera setting process (S4510), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the camera setting process (S4510). In the camera setting process (S4510), a process of determining image data captured from the camera 303 connected to the sub display control device 900 and performing language setting based on the determination result is performed.

  In the camera setting process (FIG. 64, S4510), first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration state is set in the state storage area 263m (S5301). Here, when the demonstration state is stored in the state storage area 263m, it indicates that the period is during which the demonstration screen can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (including the period between demonstrations). ing.

  In the processing of S5301, if the demonstration state is stored in the state storage area 263m (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the human sensor 304 is on (S5302). Here, when the motion sensor 304 is ON, a player (person) is in front of the pachinko machine 10. The presence of a person means being at a distance where the player can hold a playable distance (a firing handle). In the process of S5302, when it is determined that the human sensor 304 is on (S5302: Yes), image data (image data of the player's face) is read from the camera 303 (S5303). A face recognition process is executed based on the read image data (S5304). After that, the processing of S5305 is executed. Here, this face recognition is already known and discriminates skin color, hair color, and the like. On the other hand, when the state stored in the state storage area 263m is not the demonstration state (S5301: No), or when the motion sensor 304 is off (S5302: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the result of the face recognition executed in S5304 is Japanese (S5306). Here, whether or not the person is Japanese is determined based on whether the hair color is not blond hair, the iris color is black, or the like. In the process of S5305, when it is determined that the user is Japanese (S5305: Yes), the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to Japanese is set (S5306). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the result of the face recognition is not Japanese (S5305: No), the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to English is set (S5307). After that, this processing ends.

  Note that the camera setting process (S4510 in FIG. 64) may not be executed, or a changeover switch for setting not to perform the face recognition process may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 and set. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a microphone, and based on the language spoken by the player toward the microphone, the sub-display control device 900 or the like may execute switching corresponding to the language.

  In this embodiment, the face is recognized and the language is set based on the determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The order may be changed and displayed. Here, the nationality of the player is determined from the result of the face recognition, and if it is of Asian descent, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, etc. are displayed at the top of the first page. For example, English, French, British, Russian, etc. are displayed at the top of the first page. Therefore, the order of display by the player is changed, so that a language corresponding to the player can be easily found and selected from a plurality of language candidates. Further, the player may speak the language toward the pachinko machine 10 by voice recognition or the like, and the corresponding language may be displayed in the higher order (the highest order) of the language setting screen. When the language setting screen is displayed, the player speaks the language toward the pachinko machine 10 so that the displayed language can be rearranged so that the corresponding language is ranked higher. You may comprise.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the above-described firing detection processing (S4511), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the firing detection process (S4511). In this firing detection process (S4511), a process of switching the display mode of the side display device 901 to a display mode corresponding to the game mode set when detecting that a game ball has been fired during the demonstration mode is executed.

  In the launch detection process (S4511 in FIG. 65), first, it is determined whether a demonstration state is stored in the state storage area 263m (S5401). Here, when the demonstration state is stored in the state storage area 263m, it is stored that the demonstration state is present in addition to the already stored game state.

  If the demonstration state is not set in the state storage area 263m, the process ends. On the other hand, if the state of the demonstration is stored in the state storage area 263m (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether the firing sensor 305 is set to ON (S5402). The firing sensor 305 is mounted as a gate-type (magnetic detection type) sensor at the firing rail exit of the game board 13 as shown in FIG.

  In the processing of S5402, if the firing sensor 305 is off (S5402: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5402, when it is determined that the firing sensor 305 is on (S5402: Yes), the information is switched from the demonstration state set in the state storage area 263m to information of only the game state (S5403). ). The status flag 263n is set to ON (S5404). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, when the launch is detected during the demonstration state, the state flag 263n is set on so that the display mode according to the game state is displayed on the side display device 901. As described above, the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 according to the set gaming state (including the big hit state) in which the state flag 263n is set to ON by the processing of S5008 of the display setting processing (FIG. 59, S4503). Is switched. Therefore, when the player starts the game, a description of the game or the like can be displayed on the side display device 901, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the launch sensor 305 is separately provided, but the invention is not limited thereto. The touch sensor 51a of the launch handle 51 is detected, and the display mode of the side display device 901 is switched when the handle is gripped during the demonstration. May be set. Further, the display mode may be set to be switched based on a touch operation performed by the player on the side display device 901 during the demonstration state.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment, the side display device 901 is rotatably provided on the right side of the pachinko machine 10 separately from the third symbol display device 81. A variety of display effects can be provided. Further, by being rotatable, it is possible to rotate the player to an angle that is easy for the player to see, or to a position that does not interfere with the adjacent pachinko machine. Further, since the side display device 901 is of a touch panel type, the screen can be directly touch-operated, so that the player can easily operate the screen.

  In addition, since the language can be set using the side display device 901, it is possible to allow a player having a different language to play a game easily. Furthermore, since the character which notifies the jackpot expectation degree is set so that it can be switched in accordance with the language, the jackpot expectation degree can be easily informed according to the player's nationality.

  In addition, since the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 is switched based on the game state (the normal game state, the probability change game state, the time saving game state, the big hit start, the big hit end), the game state has shifted. This can be recognized by the side display device 901. In addition, since the game method in each game state is displayed on the side display device 901 in an easily understandable manner, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused even when the game state shifts.

  Further, since the installation location of the pachinko machine 10 is identified by the GPS 302 and the language is set according to the location, it is possible to reduce the trouble of setting the language every time the power is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-display control device 900 has a configuration in which the set language is not backed up at the time of power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At this time, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to be notified of the set language.

  Further, it may be set so that the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 can be switched by the operation of the player. Specifically, since a skilled player does not need to explain the game, it may be synchronized with the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a special lottery effect (special (Synchronization with the fluctuation of the symbol).

  Furthermore, the game statistics (the number of histories of the selected variation pattern type, the number of big hits, the total number of balls), and the like may be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the side display device 901 is a touch panel, but is not limited thereto, and may be a normal liquid crystal display device. Further, the display contents and the language setting of the side display device 901 may be set by voice recognition.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the sub-display control device 900 and the side display device 901 that is display-controlled by the sub-display control device 900. It is configured to display necessary information and the like.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the sub-display control device 900 and the side display device 901 are not provided in the configuration of the first embodiment, and the island facilities and the hall side where the hall side is installed are provided. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that information such as a game method is displayed on a display device 1200.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Display Mode in Second Embodiment>
First, an example of a characteristic display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the hall-side display device 1200 provided outside the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a language setting screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a language type used in the pachinko machine 10 and the hall-side display device 1200 is set. is there. In the second embodiment, a selection switch 1500 (decision switch, upper switch, lower switch) to be described later is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22. When the player presses the enter switch for a long time (3 seconds), a language setting screen (FIG. 66A) for executing the language setting is displayed. The display mode of the language setting screen is the same as the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 in the first embodiment, and is not configured to be touch-operated and does not include a plurality of pages. Differs in that When this language setting screen is displayed, when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when a display mode of a big hit game is displayed, as shown in FIG. The display mode is configured to be reduced and displayed at the lower left of the display area. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the display mode of the game even when the language is set. Therefore, by setting the language by the player, it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the result of the determination of success or failure or overlooking the effect mode.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a language setting method is displayed in both Japanese and English as a display mode of the language setting screen, and a language of which the setting can be changed is displayed below the language setting method. A list is displayed. In the language list, a flag corresponding to the language is displayed at the top, and a language name (English) and a language name are displayed next to the flag. In the first embodiment, the control processing is performed so that the selected language is set by touching the language setting icon. In the second embodiment, the cursor t is moved by the up / down switch to set the language. Is selected, and the language is set by pressing a decision switch. By pressing the up / down switch, the cursor t moves upward or downward, and when the movement of the cursor t is further instructed from the upper or lower limit of the displayed language, scroll display is performed in the indicated direction. It is configured to be.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, more language candidates can be displayed by scrolling display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a player performs an operation of switching pages as in the first embodiment. May be switched and displayed. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured by a touch panel so that a language can be set by a touch operation. Furthermore, the player may move the cursor with a voice (voice) to make a voice of the intention to make a decision, and may perform the language setting.

  An example of a comment (character) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 (b) shows an example of a comment displayed during the dynamic display of the third symbol. In this pachinko machine 10, a comment notice that displays a comment in characters during the variable display of the third symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol, or a “reach state” indicating that the state has been reached when displayed in the reach state "!" And other characters are displayed. In that case, the character is displayed in the set language, and a Japanese translation is also displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), although the third symbol is displayed in the reach display mode, at the timing when the middle symbol comes off and stops at the symbol, "Almost!" ) Is displayed. By being displayed in this manner, it is possible to easily suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is advantageous to the player when the symbol of the same number is displayed as the third symbol in the third symbol. In addition, since the content is displayed in the language set by the player, the user can be notified more easily. Also, even if the game is set in a language other than Japanese, the Japanese translation is also written, so even if the player does not understand the meaning of the displayed content and calls the clerk to listen to the content, A Japanese clerk can understand and explain the contents.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the sub display control device 900 and the side display control device 901 are deleted from the first embodiment, and an external output terminal 1002 is added. The external output terminal 1002 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, and is omitted in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, a signal is output to the external output terminal 1002 from the main controller 110 to the island facility, the hall computer, or the like at the time of start of fluctuation or at the time of error detection.

  The external output terminal 1002 is electrically connected to an external device 1100 provided in a hall-side island facility or the like. The external device 1100 is connected to a hall-side display device 1200 which is a liquid crystal display device provided in each pachinko machine 10 in an island facility or the like. The external device 1100 is configured to execute display control of the hall-side display device 1200 based on a signal (command) output from the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with a display device such as the side display device 901, and a game method of each pachinko machine 10 is provided by using a display device preset on the hall side. Is configured to be displayed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the side display device 901 on the pachinko machine 10, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the side display device 901 and the display device installed on the hall side interfere with each other.

  In the second embodiment, a wireless communication unit 1000, a sound collection device 1001, a setting switch (switch) 1300, and a selection switch 1500 are added to the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. .

  The wireless communication unit 1000 is configured by a communication device having a wireless LAN transmission / reception function capable of communicating with a wireless LAN access point installed in the store on the hall side or a public access point. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the wireless communication unit 1000 is configured to be supplied with power from the sound lamp control device 113, automatically perform initial settings, and connect to a connectable access point. I have. Specifically, communication means such as “Wi-Fi” (registered trademark) and the like can be used. In the present embodiment, a wireless LAN is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and portable communication means such as Bluetooth (registered trademark) may be used.

  The sound collection device 1001 is configured by a microphone that can input a voice spoken by a player. The sound collecting device 1001 is disposed on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10 and is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. The sound collection device 1001 is configured to be controllable by the sound lamp control device 113, and is activated when mainly performing language setting described later, acquires a voice (word) spoken by the player, and obtains a voice described later. It is configured to be stored in the data storage area 223j. When the voice data is stored in the voice data storage area 223j, a process of comparing the voice data with the language inquiry data to determine the type of language used (speaking) by the player is executed. . Thus, the language can be set in accordance with the player's language without having to operate the selection switch 1500 for the language setting. Thus, the number of operations required for the player to set the language can be reduced.

  The setting switch 1300 is a slide switch type switch that is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and that can be turned on and off. The setting switch 1300 determines whether or not to perform the language setting using the wireless communication unit 1000 in the initial language setting performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Switch. By setting the setting switch 1300 to OFF, it is possible to set so that the default language (Japanese in the present embodiment) is set without executing the language setting using the wireless communication unit 1000.

  By setting the setting switch 1300 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, only the hall side can operate the setting switch 1300, and the operation setting of the language setting can be performed according to the convenience of the hall side. it can.

  The selection switch 1500 is a push-down switch composed of an upper switch for the player to input an upward direction, a lower switch for inputting a lower direction, and a decision switch for inputting a decision. The selection switch 1500 is arranged above the upper plate 17 and is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22. In the language setting, the selection switch 1500 allows the player to move the cursor up and down in the language setting display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and set the determination switch in a state where the cursor indicates the desired language. Pressing the button executes the language setting.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, language inquiry data 222c is added to the first embodiment.

  The language inquiry data 222c stores frequency data when each language is pronounced in the language of each country. As will be described in detail later, when performing the language setting, the English language and the Japanese are written on the third symbol display device 81, and "Please speak the language name of your country with your language to the game machine. Is displayed. In this case, when the player speaks the language name in the language used, the voice data is stored (recorded) in a voice data storage area 223j described later, and the voice data and the voice data set in the language inquiry data 222c are set. Are matched to determine whether they match (a match is equal to or greater than the allowable range (70% in this embodiment)), and if it is determined that they match, the language is set.

  Therefore, when the player sets the language, the trouble of operating the selection switch 1500 can be reduced. Further, a player who does not understand the language setting operation can easily execute the language setting.

  In the present embodiment, the language collation data 222c stores the frequency data when the language name is uttered in the language. However, the language matching data 222c is not limited thereto, and characteristic words of the language (eg, greeting, Please change to the language). Alternatively, a plurality of words may be stored, and a language may be determined by determining whether there is a matching word from words uttered by the player. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a combination of frequencies characteristic of a language is stored, and whether the combination matches the combination is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 223 according to the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment in that an audio data storage area 223j and a pointer data area 223k are added.

  The voice data storage area 223j is a storage area where voice data uttered by the player acquired from the sound collection device 1001 is stored (recorded) when executing language setting processing. When the power is turned off, the sound data storage area 223j is erased without retaining its memory, and is initialized (formatted) in the initial setting when the power is turned on. When the voice data is stored in the voice data storage area 223j during the language setting processing, the voice data is compared with the data of the language verification data 222c, and a process of determining the language used by the player is executed.

  The pointer data area 223k is a storage area for storing information on the language (the language specified by the pointer) selected by the player using the up switch or the down switch of the selection switch 1500 when executing the language setting. is there. In the language setting process, when the decision switch of the selection switch 1500 is pressed, a language corresponding to the language set in the pointer data area 223k is set.

<Regarding the control processing in the second embodiment>
Next, a control process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus the description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  A control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The main difference between the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that the process related to the language setting performed by the sub control device 900 is changed to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113. is there.

  With reference to FIG. 70, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the content of the start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 70) in the second embodiment is different from the startup process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in that a language initial setting process 2 (S1120) is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processing of S1110 is executed, the language initial setting processing 2 is executed (S1120). In the language initial setting process 2 (S1120), a language to be used is set based on information such as a place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an initial setting at the time of power-on (when executing a start-up process (FIG. 70)). The processing is executed.

  Here, the language initial setting process 2 (S1120), which is one of the startup processes (FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. I do. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language initial setting process 2 (S1120).

  In the language initial setting process 2 (S1120), first, it is determined whether the setting SW 1300 is set to ON (S1121). The setting SW 1300 is disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (on the right side of the power switch), and is configured to be operable by employees of the hall and the like. The setting SW 1300 is a switch for switching whether or not to perform the initial setting of the language setting using the wireless communication unit 1000.

  In the processing of S1121, if the language SW 1300 is set to ON, that is, if it is set to set the language using the wireless communication unit 1000 (S1121: Yes), the wireless communication unit 1000 A beacon signal is obtained (S1122). The position of the connected access point is acquired from the acquired beacon signal (S1123). By connecting to the Internet, country information is acquired from the location information of the access point (S1124). It is determined whether the obtained country information is normal (S1125). If the acquired country information is determined to be abnormal, it means that the country information could not be acquired. If it is determined that the acquired country information is normal (S1125: Yes), the selected language flag 223f corresponding to the language of the acquired country information is set to ON (S1126). After that, the process of S1129 is executed. On the other hand, if the setting SW 1300 is turned off in the process of S1121 (S1121: No) or if it is determined that the country information acquired in the process of S1125 is abnormal (S1125: No), the process of S1127 is executed. In the process of S1127, the selected language flag 223f corresponding to the default language (Japanese in the present embodiment) is set to ON (S1127). Thereafter, the language setting start flag 223h is set to ON (S1128). After that, the process of S1129 is executed.

  In the processing of S1129, an external language setting command indicating the set language and a display language setting command are set (S1129). After that, this processing ends. Here, the external language setting command set in S1129 is a command for notifying the external device 1100 installed in the island facility or the like of the set language, and is transmitted to the external output terminal 1002 of the pachinko machine 10. Output. The display language setting command is a command output to the display control device 114, and is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set language information.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a language setting as an initial setting as an initial process. Here, in the present embodiment, the location where the pachinko machine 10 is installed is determined using the wireless communication unit 1000, and the language is automatically set to the language that matches the location. I have. Therefore, every time the gaming clerk turns on the power, the trouble of executing the language setting can be saved. Further, in a game store where the language setting is not required (for example, when using in Japan), the setting of the language using the wireless communication unit 1000 can be prohibited by operating the setting SW 1300. Control load can be reduced. Therefore, the rise time of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, in a game shop where many players of different nationalities are set, if the default language is set, the language setting start flag 223h is set to ON so that the language setting screen is automatically displayed after the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has a function capable of setting a language.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing (FIG. 72) in the second embodiment, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1207) is different from the main processing (FIG. 33) in the first embodiment in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1250). And language setting processing 2 (S1220) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the language setting process 2 (S1220), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the content of the language setting process 2 (S1220). This language setting process 2 (S1220) is a process of setting a language based on an instruction to the display control device 114 to display a language setting screen on the third symbol display device 81 or an operation on the selection switch 1500 by the player. Is executed.

  In the language setting process 2 (S1220), first, it is determined whether the language setting start flag 223h is set to ON (S1221). The language setting start flag 223h is a flag indicating that a language setting screen (see FIG. 66A) is to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (it is a timing to display). In the processing of S1221, when it is determined that the language setting start flag 223h is ON (S1221: Yes), a display setting start command for notifying the start of the language setting is set to the display control device 114 ( S1222). As will be described later, when the display control device 114 receives the display setting start command, the display control device 114 executes the display setting of the language setting screen (FIG. 66A) on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1222 is executed, the language setting start flag 223h is set to off (S1223). Thereafter, the language setting flag 223i is set to ON (S1224). The language setting flag 223i is a flag indicating that a language setting screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to select a language setting. After that, the process of S1225 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1221, if it is determined that the language setting start flag is off (S1221: No), the processing of S1225 is executed.

  In the process of S1225, it is determined whether the language setting flag 223i is on (S1225). If it is determined that the language setting flag 223i is off (S1225: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the language setting flag 223i is on (S1225: Yes), it is determined whether the decision switch of the selection switch 1500 is pressed (S1226). If it is determined that the decision switch has been pressed (S1226: Yes), the selected language flag 223f corresponding to the language information set in the pointer data area 223k is set to ON (S1227). An external language setting command for notifying the external device 1100 of the set language information and a display language setting command for notifying the language information set to the display control device 114 are set (S1228). The language setting flag 223i is turned off (S1229). After that, the process of S1231 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1226, when it is determined that the determination switch has not been pressed (S1226: No), a voice analysis process is executed (S1230). The sound analysis processing (S1230) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 74. However, the speech sound data of the player acquired from the sound collection device 1001 is determined, the analysis is performed, and the language is set. Is performed. When the voice analysis processing (S1230) is executed, the processing of S1231 is executed.

  In the process of S1230, it is determined whether the lower switch or the upper switch of the selection switch 1500 has been pressed (S1231). If it is determined that the down switch or the up switch has not been pressed (S1231: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the down switch or the up switch has been pressed (S1231: Yes), and if the up switch has been pressed, the cursor t moves upward (see FIG. 66A). Is set in the pointer data area 223k, and when the down switch is pressed, the language information when the cursor t (see FIG. 66 (a)) is moved downward is set in the pointer data area. It is set to 223k (S1232). Here, a list data of language information is stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When the language setting is started, the currently set language data is set in the pointer data area 223k, A language setting screen is displayed so that the language information is displayed at the top. Upon receiving the display setting start command, the display control device 114 sets the language setting screen at the position where the set language information is displayed at the top (in a state where the cursor t is placed in the set language). Is set to be displayed. After the processing of S1232 is executed, a display up / down command corresponding to the operated selection switch 1500 is set in the display control device 114 (S1233). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of the voice analysis process (S1230), which is one of the language setting processes 2 (S1220) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the voice analysis processing (S1230). In the voice analysis processing (S1230), the processing of analyzing the uttered voice data acquired (recorded) from the sound collection device 1001, determining the language information of the player, and setting the corresponding language is executed.

  In the voice analysis processing (S1230), first, it is determined whether or not utterance voice data is stored in the voice data storage area 223j (S1231). When it is determined that the uttered voice data is not stored in the voice data storage area 223j (S1231: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1231 that the uttered voice data is stored in the voice data storage area 223j (S1231: Yes), the uttered voice data of the voice data storage area 223j is acquired (S1232). The frequency data of the acquired utterance voice data is analyzed to determine whether it matches the frequency data corresponding to the language stored in the language inquiry data 222c (S1233).

  Here, the language inquiry data 222c stores frequency data when each language name is spoken in that language. In the process of S1233, a process of analyzing whether or not the frequency data matches the frequency data of the acquired utterance data of the player by 70% or more is executed. In the processing of S1234, it is determined whether there is a matching language in the processing of S1233 (S1234). If it is determined that there is no matching language (S1234: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the matching language is matched (S1234: Yes), the selected language flag 223f corresponding to the matched language is set to ON (S1235). An external language setting command for notifying the external device 1100 of the set language information and a display language setting command for notifying the language information set to the display control device 114 are set (S1236). The language setting flag 223i is set to off (S1237). After that, this processing ends.

  By uttering the language desired by the player toward the pachinko machine 10 in this manner, the uttered voice data is acquired by the pachinko machine 10, and the language setting is automatically executed based on the analysis result. Therefore, the language can be easily changed even by a player who does not know the operation. In the present embodiment, when the language setting screen is displayed, the language setting method is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, a configuration method (see FIG. 66A) using the selection switch 1500 and a configuration method (not shown) for voice recognition are displayed. Therefore, even if the desired language is not set even if the language is set by the utterance, the language setting can be performed again by operating the selection switch 1500.

  Next, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1250), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1250).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1250), first, it is determined whether the language setting start flag 223h or the language setting flag 223i is on (S1251). Here, if the language setting start flag 223h or the language setting flag 223i is ON (S1251: Yes), it means that the language setting has already been started or the language setting is in progress, so that the language setting is started. The process shifts to the process of S1254 in which the process related to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed without determining whether or not the operation of setting is performed by the player.

  On the other hand, if the language setting start flag 223h and the language setting flag 223i are off (S1251: No), it is determined whether the determination switch of the selection switch 1500 has been pressed and held for 3 seconds or more (S1252). If it is determined that the determination switch has been pressed for a long time (S1252: Yes), the language setting start flag 223h is set to ON (S1253). After that, the process of S1254 is executed. In the process of S1254, a control process such as an effect displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed is executed. After the processing of S1254 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  The command determination process (S2202) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the command determination process (S2202, FIG. 76) in the second embodiment, the processes in S2314 and S2315 are changed to S2320 and S2330, respectively, in comparison to the command determination process (S2202, FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Differs in that Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2312, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2312: No), the process of S2320 is executed. In the processing of S2320, it is determined whether there is a command related to language setting (S2320). Here, the language setting-related commands correspond to a display language setting command, a display setting start command, and a display up / down command output by the audio lamp control device 113.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2320 that a command related to language setting has been received (S2320: Yes), language setting related processing is executed (S2330). Here, the language setting related processing (S2330) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language setting-related processing (S2330). In the language setting-related processing (S2330, FIG. 77), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display language setting command (S2331). If it is determined that there is no display language setting command (S2331: No), the process proceeds to S2333. If it is determined that there is a display language setting command (S2331: Yes), language setting command processing 2 is executed (S2332).

  Here, the language setting command processing 2 (S2332) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the content of the language setting command processing 2 (S2332). In the language setting command process 2 (S2332), first, a process of setting a display data table corresponding to the current game is executed (S2911), whereby the display mode of the game reduced from the language setting screen is changed to a normal display mode. The display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display language setting value corresponding to the received language is set (S2912). The start address of the display language data storage area 235f corresponding to the set language is set (S2913). The head address of the notice display data storage area 235g corresponding to the set language is set (S2914). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the process of switching the display language in accordance with the set language is the same as the configuration described in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. After executing the language setting command process 2 (S2332), the process of S2333 is executed. In the processing of S2333, it is determined whether there is a display setting start command (S2333). If it is determined that there is no display setting start command (S2333: No), the process proceeds to S2335. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2333 that there is a display setting start command (S2333: Yes), a language start command process is executed (S2334).

  Here, the language start command processing (S2334) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language start command processing (S2334). In this setting start command processing (S2334), display setting (switching display) of the language setting screen (FIG. 66A) is executed.

  In the setting start command processing (S2334), first, a language candidate (language information) corresponding to the current language setting is displayed at the top, and a language setting display data table is determined such that the cursor t is placed at that position. Then, the determined language setting display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2341).

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the language setting display data table set in S2341 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2342). Next, time data corresponding to the language setting display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2341 is set in the time counter 233h (S2343), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2344). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. After executing the language start command processing (S2334), the processing of S2335 is executed. In the process of S2335, it is determined whether a display up / down command has been received (S2335). If it is determined that the display up / down command has been received (S2335), the position of the pointer set in the display data table buffer is moved in accordance with the operation direction indicated by the display up / down command (S2335). S2336). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82, a process executed by the external device 1100 according to the second embodiment will be described. The external device 1100 controls the display of the hall-side display device 1200, the display control of a display for displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and the game of the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer based on the command output from the pachinko machine 10. Sending data, etc.

  Referring to FIG. 80, the main process (S6000) executed by this external device 1100 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing (S6000).

  In the main process (S6000), first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the current process of S6001 (S6001). If not (S6001: No), the process proceeds to S6006 without performing the processes of S6002 to S6005. In the process of S6001, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. Unlike S6002 to S6005, which need not be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), the command determination process of S6006 and the display of S6007 This is because it is preferable to execute the control processing in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S6006 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the pachinko machine 10, and by executing the processing of S6007 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing is Based on this, it is possible to make settings relating to display control without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S6001 (S6001: Yes), first, the processing of outputting the command set by the processing of S6002 to S6007 to the hall-side display control device 1200, the display, the hall computer, and the like. Execute (S6002). Next, based on the command output from each pachinko machine 10, a process of totalizing the received data is executed (S6003). Here, a process is executed in which a jackpot signal, a change start signal, and the like output from each pachinko machine 10 are totaled and data to be output to each display device or the like is calculated.

  Thereafter, a counter display control process is executed (S6004). Here, a display control signal is output to the display device to perform display control. Thereafter, based on the signal output from the pachinko machine 10, a process for notifying an error or the like to the hall computer is executed (S6005). Thereafter, a command determination process 6006 is executed, and a display control process S6007 for performing display control of the hall-side display device 1200 is executed. After that, the process returns to S6001 and the process is repeatedly executed.

  Here, the command determination process (S6006), which is one of the main processes (S6000) executed by the external device 1100, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination processing (S6006).

  In the command determination process (S6006), first, it is determined whether a command indicating the start of change has been received from the pachinko machine 10 (S6101). If it is determined that the command indicating the start of the change has been received (S6101: Yes), the number of times of the start of the change is stored (S6102), and the game corresponding to the game state attached to the command indicating the start of the change corresponds to the game. The state is set (stored) (S6103). Here, the gaming state is any of a jackpot gaming state, a normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), a probable changing gaming state (high-probability gaming state), a time-saving gaming state, and a demonstration gaming state. After executing the processing of S6103, this processing ends. This command determination processing (S6006) is repeatedly executed until there is no more received command.

  In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the command indicating the start of change has not been received (S6101: No), it is determined whether the command of starting the big hit has been received (S6104). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S6104: Yes), the number of jackpots is stored (S6105), and the gaming state is determined according to the jackpot type (any of jackpot A to jackpot D). It is set (S6106). Here, on the hall-side display device 1200, the game description during the jackpot displayed on the side display device 901 described in the first embodiment is displayed. Therefore, by notifying the jackpot type or the like, the description of the jackpot game or the like of the rank up can be executed on the hall-side display device 1200. Note that the main controller 110 outputs, to the external output terminal 1002, specification information and information such as the start of a jackpot game and the start of fluctuation. After the processing of S6106 is performed, this processing ends.

  In the process of S6104, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S6104: No), it is determined whether or not the specification information has been received from the main control device 110 (S6107). If the specification information has been received, the specification information is stored (S6108). After that, this processing ends. Here, by receiving the specification information from the main control device 110, the explanation of the jackpot probability and the like can be displayed on the hall side display device 1200 as displayed on the side display device 901 in the first embodiment. .

  In the process of S6107, if it is determined that the specification information has not been received (S6107: No), it is determined whether an external language setting command has been received (S6109). If it is determined that the external language setting command has been received (S6109: Yes), the language indicated by the command is set as the display language (S6110). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6109 that the external language setting command has not been received (S6109: No), processing according to the other received commands is executed (S6111), and this processing ends.

  Next, a display control process (S6007), which is one of the main processes (S6000) executed by the external device 1100, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display control process (S6007). In the display control process (S6007), a process of controlling the display of the hall-side display device 1200 is executed.

  In the display control process (S6007), first, display information data on the pachinko machine 10 (corresponding to the display data stored in the character ROM 264 of the sub display control device 900 in the first embodiment) is sent to the external device 1100. Determine whether it has been received. The display data is transmitted to the external device 1100 from a transmitter for image information transfer connected to the game store. Thus, the amusement store can transmit necessary display data to each hall-side display device 1200 only by setting image data in the transmitter in the ROM or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM in which the display data for the hall-side display device 1200 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 sold by the gaming machine maker is stored in the hall is set to the external device 1100. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to transfer the data to the external device 1100. With this configuration, it is possible to save the cost of purchasing the hall side and the trouble of installation.

  If it is determined in the process of S6201 that display data has been received (S6201: Yes), a load image is set for the hall-side display device 1200 (S6202). The received display data is set in the display data storage area of the external device 1100 (S6203). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6201 that no display data has been received (S6201: No), display data corresponding to the current game state and the language setting is selected (S6204). The selected display data is set for the hall-side display device 1200 (S6205). After that, this processing ends. Here, the content displayed on the hall side display device 1200 is based on the description of the game method displayed on the side display device 901 described in the first embodiment and the description of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game state. Is displayed. The display mode of the language setting displayed on the side display device 901 is not displayed on the hall side display device 1200.

  Also, as a method of setting (transferring) the display data of the hall-side display device 1200 to the external device 1100, the external device 1100 and the hall-side display device 1200 are configured so as to be connectable to the Internet, and are required from the web. The display data may be downloaded. As for this display data, a gaming machine maker creates and uploads it on a predetermined HP, and uses data uploaded by a trader or a trading company that creates display data of the hall-side display device 1200. It is possible. With this configuration, the display data displayed on the hall-side display device 1200 can be updated at any time. Further, the content displayed on the hall-side display device 1200 is changed based on the information on the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations output from the pachinko machine 10 (for example, when the number of jackpots becomes 10 or more, a new display is displayed). Download and set data, or change the display content based on the start of fluctuation.) With this configuration, the content displayed on the hall-side display device 1200 is changed according to the passage of days after introduction into the hall or the state of the player playing (how many games have been played (the number of big hits, the number of fluctuations, etc.)). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Furthermore, a premiere effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 that was not displayed on the hall side display device 1200 immediately after the introduction of the pachinko machine 10, and a hidden button that does not notify the timing of pressing the frame button 22. It is possible to notify the effect or the like, change the jackpot number ranking of the same model in halls nationwide, or display statistical data such as a change effect (change pattern) and a notice display mode that have become a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the language and notifies the external device 1100 of the setting content. However, the language setting is executed by the hall-side display device 1200 (external device 1100). The setting contents may be notified to the pachinko machine 10 (the sound lamp control device 113 and the like). Furthermore, a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 is not provided in the pachinko machine 10, and all display effects, display of language settings, and the like are performed using a display device installed on the hall side. You may comprise.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the electrical configuration, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the sub display control device 900, and the like are configured to share and control the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed by one integrated control device. Further, the control device may be a control device in which all or some of the control devices other than the main control device 110 are integrated.

  Note that all or some of the above-described configurations and modifications may be combined.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A group> (switch language)
Display means for displaying at least character information indicating the contents of the game, storage means for storing the character information corresponding to a plurality of language types displayed on the display means, and the character displayed on the display means Determining means for determining a language type of information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition; display control means for acquiring the character information corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means from the storage means and displaying the character information on the display means A gaming machine A1 comprising:

  Here, for example, there is known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, characters are displayed to inform the player of the contents of the game, the state of the game, and the like. In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a game machine in which a variety of comments and the like are displayed in characters on a liquid crystal display so that a player can play a game in a manner that is easy to understand (for example, JP-A-2007-105333). In this case, the displayed language is only displayed in the characters of the predetermined language, and the inability to switch to a different language makes the game monotonous, causing the player to get bored early. there were.

  According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to switch the language type displayed on the display means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the game machine A1 includes: a selection unit that allows a player to select one language type from a plurality of language types; and a determination unit that determines a language type selected by the selection unit. The game machine A2, wherein the means determines the language type determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the player can select the language type, so that it is possible to display the character information according to the language desired by the player, and There is an effect that the player can play the game in an easily understandable manner.

  The gaming machine A3, further comprising language information display means for displaying language information indicating a language type selectable by the selection means in the gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, there is an effect that the language type can be selected easily by the selecting means.

  In the gaming machine A3, the language information display means is provided separately from the display means, and the selection means performs a touch operation by the player on the language information displayed on the language information display means. A game machine A4 characterized by being configured to be able to select one of the languages.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3, the language type can be selected by touching the language information display means provided separately from the display means, so that the information displayed on the display means is obstructed. This has the effect that the language type can be selected while suppressing this.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, and then stopped. Dynamic display means for displaying, and privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, since the display means displays the identification information indicating the lottery result, it is expected that the specific lottery result is displayed. There is an effect that a game can be played.

  In the gaming machine A5, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a preview display mode in which a preview display mode indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means. Means, a notice selection means for selecting a type of a notice display mode displayed by the notice display means based on a lottery result by the lottery means, and the notice selection means based on a language type determined by the decision means. A gaming machine A6 comprising: switching means for switching the selected advance notice display mode to the advance notice display mode corresponding to the determined language type.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, the notice display mode indicating the degree of expectation can be switched in accordance with the determined language type, so that the display mode can be changed according to the nationality of the player. There is an effect that the degree of expectation can be reported.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, audio output means capable of outputting at least audio indicating the content of the game, and audio storage in which audio data corresponding to the plurality of language types output by the audio output means is stored. A game machine A7 comprising: means and voice selecting means for selecting voice data corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means from the voice storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the output voice can be adjusted to the language determined by the determining means, so that the player can easily play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, having position identification means capable of identifying current location information, wherein the determination means determines a language type corresponding to the current location information identified by the location identification means; A8. A gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, a language corresponding to the location information where the gaming machine is installed can be determined. There is an effect that can be.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 has image information acquiring means capable of acquiring image information of the player, and nationality judging means for judging the nationality of the player from the image information acquired by the image information acquiring means. The gaming machine A9, wherein the determining means determines a language type based on the nationality determined by the nationality determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the language according to the nationality of the player can be determined and displayed, so that the player can easily play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  Setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states in one of the gaming machines A5 to A9 based on a predetermined trigger; and displaying the game information based on the gaming state set by the setting means. A game machine A10 characterized by having a game information display means for displaying the game information on the game machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A5 to A9, the game information is displayed on the display means based on the change in the game state, so that the player is notified of the change in the game state in an easily understandable manner. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A10, the gaming information includes a display mode indicating a gaming method in a set gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the gaming method based on the gaming state is displayed as the gaming information, so that even if the gaming method is changed, the player can easily play the game. This has the effect.

  The gaming machine A10 or A11 has a lottery probability setting means for setting a lottery probability of the lottery means based on the gaming state, and the game information includes a lottery probability set by the lottery probability setting means. A gaming machine A12 characterized by including information indicating the information.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10 or A11, the lottery probability set based on the gaming state can be identified by the displayed gaming information, so that the player can easily play the game. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic B group> (Play method explanation by side display)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, first display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification indicating a specific lottery result on the first display means. When the information is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and a first game state as a game state of the game and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. 2 game state setting means that can be set by switching between game states, second display means different from the first display means, and second display for displaying game information different from the identification information on the second display means. A game system comprising: control means; and switching means for switching the content of the game information displayed by the second display control means based on a game state set by the game state setting means. Machine B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, when a lottery condition established with a winning of a game ball to a starting port or the like is established, a determination as to whether or not the game is successful is made with a predetermined lottery probability. If it is determined that the winning is determined in the game success / failure determination, a determination is made as to whether or not to shift the lottery probability to a high probability that is advantageous to the player. There is known a gaming machine which is shifted to a gaming state set to. As described above, a gaming machine in which a game is diversified by shifting to a plurality of gaming states has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125820).

  On the other hand, when a plurality of game states are switched and set, the game content becomes complicated, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the content of the set game state.

  According to the gaming machine B1, game information different from the identification information is switched based on the game state and is displayed on the second display means, so that the player can easily identify the change of the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

  In the gaming machine B1, an entrance where a game ball can enter, a judging means for judging the establishment of the lottery condition based on having entered the entrance, and the specific lottery result by the lottery means. And a probability setting means for varying the lottery probability of the lottery based on the game state. The probability indicating the lottery probability set by the probability setting means as the game information displayed by the second display means. A gaming machine B2 containing at least information.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the lottery probability that is varied depending on the gaming state is displayed as game information on the second display means, so that the game can be correctly recognized and played. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 has a privilege game determining means for determining a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and the game information displayed on the second display means includes the privilege game determining means. A game machine B3 characterized by including information on the type of privilege game determined by the above.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the type of the privilege game being executed can be confirmed by the game information displayed on the second display means, and the player can play the privilege game. There is an effect that it can be performed easily.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area, a detecting means for detecting that the launching means has launched a gaming ball, and a case where the lottery condition is not satisfied for a predetermined period And standby display means for displaying a predetermined standby display mode on the second display means, wherein the switching means, when the standby display mode is displayed on the second display means, A gaming machine B4 for switching from the standby display mode to gaming information based on the set gaming state and displaying the information based on the detection of the launch of a gaming ball by the detecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, the fact that the player has started the game is detected by the detection means, and the display mode of the second display means is changed to a display mode that matches the start of the game. This has the effect of being able to switch.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the game information displayed on the second display means includes a notification mode for notifying a player of the position of the entrance hole. Gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, since the position of the entrance is displayed on the second display means in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the player can recognize the game method from the game information. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a language variable means for changing a language type displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and a player selects a language type changed by the language variable means. A gaming machine B6 having a language designating means capable of designating.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the language can be changed to the language type designated by the player, so that the player can easily play the game. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the second display means has an operation determination means capable of determining that a player has performed a touch operation on a display area, and the second display control means includes an operation determination means. A game machine B7 for changing the content of the game information to be displayed based on the determination result of the game machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the content of the game information can be changed by touching the second display means, so that the game information tailored to the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of games can be performed.

  In any of the gaming machines B4 to B7, a first entrance and a second entrance different from the first entrance are provided as the entrance, and are set by the game state setting means. Ball entry setting means for setting the type of entrance that is advantageous to the player based on the game state to be played, and the game information displayed by the second display means includes: A gaming machine B8 characterized by including entry information indicating an advantageous entry opening.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B4 to B7, it is possible to inform about the entrance that is advantageous to the player, so that the gaming method advantageous to the player can be informed clearly. is there.

<Feature C group> (System claims)
In a gaming system comprising at least a gaming machine capable of outputting game information and external control means capable of executing control based on the gaming information output from the gaming machine, the gaming machine Corresponds to an input unit having an input unit to which a player can input, a determining unit for determining a language type based on information input to the input unit, and a language type determined by the determining unit. Output means capable of outputting language type information to the external control means, the external control means comprising: an external display means for displaying at least character information; and a plurality of types of languages to be displayed on the external display means. A storage unit storing the character information corresponding to the type, and acquiring the character information corresponding to the language type information output from the output unit from the storage unit, and Gaming system C1, characterized in that it comprises a display control means for displaying on.

  Here, for example, there is known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, characters are displayed to inform the player of the contents of the game, the state of the game, and the like. In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a game machine in which a variety of comments and the like are displayed in characters on a liquid crystal display so that a player can play a game in a manner that is easy to understand (for example, JP-A-2007-105333). In this case, the displayed language is only displayed in the characters of the predetermined language, and the inability to switch to a different language makes the game monotonous, causing the player to get bored early. there were. Further, in the hall where the gaming machine is installed, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is arranged near the gaming machine on the side of the hall store, and the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations are received from the hall computer or the like and the information is received. It is configured to display. Also, the game device is configured to display a game method or the like on the display device on the side of the hall or to display an advertisement of the hall store. Even in such a configuration in which the display device on the hall side is provided, the language to be displayed cannot be switched, or the displayed content has nothing to do with the effect content of the gaming machine, so that the player may There was a problem that got tired.

  According to the gaming system C1, the character information displayed on the external display device is switched in the language determined by the player using the gaming machine, so that the information adapted to the player can be displayed on the external display device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game system that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine system C1, the input unit of the gaming machine has an acquiring unit capable of acquiring utterance information of a player, and the gaming machine is configured to execute the following based on the utterance information acquired by the acquiring unit. A gaming system C2 comprising: linguistic information determining means for determining linguistic information used by a player.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the utterance information of the player is obtained by the obtaining means, and the linguistic information can be determined by the linguistic information determining means based on the obtained utterance information. There is an effect that the language used by the player can be identified by a simple operation (an operation performed by the player).

  In the gaming system C1 or C2, the gaming machine is provided with: a position information acquiring unit capable of acquiring position information where the gaming machine is installed; and the language type based on the position information acquired by the position information acquiring unit. Language type information determining means for determining information, wherein the output means outputs the language information determined by the language type information determining means to the external control device. Gaming system C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position information at which the gaming machine is set is obtained by the position information obtaining means, and the language type determination means determines the language information based on the obtained position information. Then, the determined language information is output to the external control device by the output means. Therefore, when linguistic information is output to the external control device, there is an effect that linguistic information can be easily output in accordance with a place where the gaming machine is installed.

  In any of the gaming systems C1 to C3, the gaming machine stores at least display means for displaying character information indicating the content of the game, and the character information corresponding to a plurality of types of language displayed on the display means. Character information storage means, and character information display control means for acquiring the character information corresponding to the language type determined by the determination means from the character information storage means and displaying the character information on the display means. Game system C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the character information displayed on the gaming machine can be displayed in a language corresponding to the language information determined by the determining means. There is an effect that a combined easy-to-understand effect can be performed.

  In any of the gaming systems C1 to C4, the gaming machine has a connection unit that can be electrically connected to the external control device, and the output unit of the gaming machine outputs the language type information to the connection unit. A game system C5 characterized by outputting the following.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, there is an effect that transmission and reception of signals between the gaming machine and the external control device can be executed with a simple configuration.

  In any one of the gaming systems C1 to C5, the gaming machine displays lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition and identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on the display means for a predetermined period of time. Dynamic display means for stopping and displaying after the dynamic display, and when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display means, privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player, A game system C6 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, in the gaming machine, after the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, whether the specific lottery result is obtained. For example, since the privilege is provided by the privilege providing means, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming system C6, the gaming machine outputs information indicating that a privilege has been granted to the external control means based on the privilege being granted by the privilege granting means, The external control means, based on receiving the information indicating that the privilege has been given, a counting means for counting that the benefit has been given, and the counting information counted by the counting means to the player. A game system C7 comprising: a notifying unit for notifying the user of the game.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C6, the number of times given by the privilege giving means is counted by the counting means, and the counting information is notified to the player by the notifying means. There is an effect that it is possible to inform the player of the number of times the privilege has been given in an easily understandable manner while suppressing the load.

  In any of the gaming systems C6 and C7, the gaming machine displays a notice indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a specific lottery result during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Notice display means for displaying the mode on the display means, notice selection means for selecting the type of the notice display mode displayed by the notice display means based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the decision means A game system C8 comprising: switching means for switching the notice display mode selected by the notice selecting means based on the language type to the notice display mode corresponding to the determined language type.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6 or C7. That is, the notice display mode selected by the notice selection means based on the lottery result by the lottery means is switched and selected by the switching means in accordance with the language type, so that the notice display mode adapted to the player is displayed. Can be. Therefore. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Characteristic D group> (A configuration in which language information is output from a gaming machine to an external device)
An input unit having an input unit capable of inputting by a player; a determination unit for determining one language type from a plurality of language types based on input content input by the input unit; A gaming machine D1 comprising: an output unit for outputting a signal; and an output unit that outputs a signal indicating the language type determined by the determination unit to the output unit.

  Here, for example, there is known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, characters are displayed to inform the player of the contents of the game, the state of the game, and the like. In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a game machine in which a variety of comments and the like are displayed in characters on a liquid crystal display so that a player can play a game in a manner that is easy to understand (for example, JP-A-2007-105333). Further, in the hall where the gaming machine is installed, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is arranged near the gaming machine on the side of the hall store, and the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations are received from the hall computer or the like and the information is received. It is configured to display. Also, the game device is configured to display a game method or the like on the display device on the side of the hall or to display an advertisement of the hall store. In such a configuration in which a display device on the side of the hall is provided, it is not possible to switch the language to be displayed, or the displayed content is not related to the effect content of the gaming machine, so that the player gets tired early. There was a problem that was.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the player can set the language type using the input means, and the set language type is output to the outside of the gaming machine, so that the device can be connected to the gaming machine. The language desired by the player can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in the language type according to his / her request, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine D1, display means for displaying at least character information indicating the content of the game, storage means for storing the character information corresponding to a plurality of language types to be displayed on the display means, A display control unit for acquiring the character information corresponding to the determined language type from the storage unit and displaying the acquired character information on the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, character information corresponding to the language type set and input by the player can be displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the game can be easily understood. This has the effect of notifying the player.

  The gaming machine D2 has an initial language type storage unit in which a predetermined initial language type is stored, and the display control unit uses the determination unit to set the initial language type stored in the initial language type storage unit. When a language type different from that of the first language type is determined, the additional information display control unit displays character information in the language type determined by the determination unit and the initial language type. Gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the initial language type and the language type set by the player are written together, so that it is possible to perform a game effect corresponding to a player of another nationality. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D3, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and an operation of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means on the display means for a predetermined period and then stopping the display. Target display means, a privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display means, and a specific lottery at least by the lottery means. A gaming machine D4 comprising: a lottery probability information output unit that outputs a lottery probability information signal indicating a lottery probability determined as a result to the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a lottery probability information signal indicating a lottery probability determined to be a specific lottery result by the lottery means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, the current lottery probability is notified to the player by an external device in an easily understandable manner. This has the effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the gaming machine D4, a probability setting means for setting the lottery probability of the lottery means, a normal game state set to the first probability by the probability setting means, and a second probability higher than the normal game state are set. A special game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a game state setting means capable of at least setting a game state, and a game state information signal indicating a game state set by the game state setting means to the output unit. A gaming machine D5 having information output means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, a gaming state information signal indicating the gaming state is output to the outside of the gaming machine, so that the current gaming state is notified in an easy-to-understand manner by an external device. This has the effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  An acquisition unit capable of acquiring position information in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a language information determination unit for determining language information based on the position information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a language information determination unit A game machine D6 comprising: a language information output unit that outputs a language information signal indicating the language information determined by the above to the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5. That is, the position information at which the gaming machine is set is obtained by the position information obtaining means, and the language type determination means determines the language information based on the obtained position information. Then, the determined language information is output to the outside of the gaming machine by the language information output means. Therefore, when linguistic information is output to an external device, there is an effect that linguistic information adapted to a place where the gaming machine is installed can be easily output.

  An acquisition unit capable of acquiring voice data spoken by the player in any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, and a speech language information discrimination unit capable of discriminating language information based on the speech data acquired by the acquisition unit And a speech language information output means capable of outputting a speech language information signal indicating the language information determined by the speech language information determination means to the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the utterance information of the player is obtained by the obtaining means, and the linguistic information can be determined by the linguistic information determining means based on the obtained utterance information. There is an effect that the language used by the player can be identified by an easy operation (an operation performed by the player).

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through a winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery condition that is established in accordance with a winning of a game ball to a starting port or the like is established, a determination as to whether or not a game is made is made with a predetermined lottery probability. If it is determined that the winning is determined in the game success / failure determination, a determination is made as to whether or not to shift the lottery probability to a high probability that is advantageous to the player. There is known a gaming machine which is shifted to a gaming state set to. As described above, a gaming machine in which the game is diversified by shifting to a plurality of gaming states has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125820).
In this kind of pachinko machine, a plurality of game states are switched and set, so that the game content becomes complicated, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the content of the set game state.
The technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition and a first display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. And a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the first display means, and a first game as a game state of the game. Game state setting means capable of setting by switching between a state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, a second display means different from the first display means, and a second display thereof Second display control means for causing the means to display game information different from the identification information, and contents of the game information displayed by the second display control means based on a game state set by the game state setting means. switching And a switching means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed on the first display means. When the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the first display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the first game state and the first game state are set as the game state of the game. The game state setting means is set so as to switch between a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Game information different from the identification information is displayed on the second display means different from the first display means by the second display control means, and the content of the game information displayed by the second display control means is set by the game state setting means. Switching is performed by the switching means based on the game state to be played.
Thereby, the game information different from the identification information is switched based on the game state and displayed on the second display means, so that the player can easily recognize the switching of the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device ( display means)
234d2 display language data storage area (part of storage means)
264d2 display language data storage area (part of storage means)
1001 sound collector (voice acquisition means)
S1209 determining means
S1230 Voice language discriminating means
S1503 acquisition means
Part of S2902 display control means
S5104 selection means

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying at least character information indicating the content of the game;
Determining means for determining a language type of the character information displayed on the display means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Different specific addresses are set for each of the language types determined by the determining means, and are set to a plurality of addresses moved from each of the specific addresses corresponding to a plurality of address information indicating a predetermined address, A plurality of individual storage areas in which character information of the language type corresponding to the specific address is stored, wherein the individual address set to an address moved from each of the specific addresses corresponding to the same address information; A storage unit in which the character information indicating the same display content is stored in a storage area corresponding to the language type of the individual storage area;
Acquiring means for acquiring the address information corresponding to the display content of the character information to be displayed on the display means, based on satisfaction of a display condition;
The character information stored in the individual storage area shifted by an address corresponding to the address information acquired by the acquisition means with reference to the specific address corresponding to the language type determined by the determination means. Selecting means for selecting
Display control means for displaying the character information selected by the selection means on the display means,
Voice acquisition means capable of acquiring speech data spoken by the player;
Based on the utterance data obtained by the voice obtaining unit, a voice language determining unit capable of determining a language type,
It said determining means, based on the language type is determined by the audio language discriminating unit state, and are not to determine the language type,
The display control means,
Game information including the character information selected by the selection means is displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine wherein the content of the gaming information is switched and displayed based on a gaming state .

Images